Canon EOS 100D User manual

Canon EOS 100D User manual
ENGLISH
The “Quick Reference Guide” is included at the end of this manual.
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Introduction
The EOS 100D is a digital single-lens reflex camera featuring a finedetail CMOS sensor with approx. 18.0 effective megapixels, DIGIC 5,
high-precision and high-speed 9-point AF, approx. 4 fps continuous
shooting, Live View shooting, and Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie
shooting.
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety
Precautions” (p.353-355) and “Handling Precautions” (p.20, 21).
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they
come out. You can then better understand the camera.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory
card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that
certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
2
Compatible Cards
The camera can use the following cards regardless of capacity:
• SD memory cards
• SDHC memory cards*
• SDXC memory cards*
* UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card rated SD
Speed Class 6 “
” or higher.
If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may
not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card
with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.
If you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie, you will need
an even faster card.
To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website.
In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording images/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
3
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items have been included
with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with eyecup and body cap)
Wide Strap
Battery Pack
LP-E12
(with protective cover)
Battery Charger
LC-E12/LC-E12E*
Interface Cable
* Battery Charger LC-E12 or LC-E12E is provided. (The LC-E12E comes with a
power cord.)
The Instruction Manuals and DVD/CD-ROMs provided are listed on the next
page.
If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
Depending on the Lens Kit type, lens instruction manuals may also be
included.
Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
4
Instruction Manual and DVD/CD-ROMs
The instruction manual consists of a booklet and PDF manuals in
electronic form (provided on the DVD-ROM).
Basic Instruction Manual
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
© CA
.
e EU
NON IN
C. 20XX. Made in th
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
Contains the following PDF manuals:
• Instruction Manual (Detailed version)
• Software Instruction Manuals for the software on the
EOS Solution Disk.
* Instructions for viewing the Instruction Manuals on the DVD-ROM are on pages
361-362.
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
EOS Solution Disk
Contains various software. For outlines and installation
procedure of the software, see pages 365-367.
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
5
Quick Start Guide
1
Insert the battery (p.32).
2
Insert a card (p.32).
3
To charge the battery, see page 30.
With the card’s label facing toward
the back of the camera, insert it into
the card slot.
White index
Red index
Attach the lens (p.40).
Align the lens’ white or red index
with the camera’s index in the
matching color.
4
Set the lens focus mode switch
to <AF> (p.40).
5
Set the power switch to <1>
(p.35).
6
When the LCD monitor displays the
date/time/zone setting screens, see
page 37.
Quick Start Guide
6
Set the Mode Dial to <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) (p.58).
7
Focus the subject (p.43).
8
Take the picture (p.43).
9
All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
Look through the viewfinder and
aim the viewfinder center over the
subject.
Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus the
subject.
If necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised automatically.
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
Review the picture (p.217).
The captured image will be displayed
for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.
To display the image again, press
the <x> button (p.89).
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.149).
To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.89).
To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.268).
7
Conventions Used in this Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>
: Indicates the Main Dial.
<W><X><Y><Z>
: Indicates the <S> cross keys.
<0>
: Indicates the Setting button.
0, 9, 7, 8
: Indicates that the corresponding function
remains active for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or
16 sec. respectively after you let go of the
button.
* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,
and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the
LCD monitor.
3
: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the
<M> button and changing the setting.
M
: When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates that
the function is available only in the Creative Zone modes
(p.26).
(p.**)
: Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Problem-solving advice.
Basic Assumptions
All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch
is <1> (p.35).
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are
set to their defaults.
The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the
EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II lens as an example.
8
Chapters
For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s
basic operations and shooting procedures.
Introduction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
2
Getting Started
29
Basic Shooting and Image Playback
57
Creative Shooting
91
Advanced Shooting
113
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
149
Shooting Movies
181
Handy Features
215
Image Playback
241
Post-Processing Images
273
Printing Images
281
Customizing the Camera
297
Reference
307
Viewing the DVD-ROM Instruction Manuals /
Downloading Images to Your Computer
359
Quick Reference Guide and Index
369
9
Contents at a Glance
Shooting
Shoot automatically
Î p.57-79 (Basic Zone modes)
Shoot continuously
Î p.108 (i Continuous shooting)
Take a picture of yourself in a group Î p.110 (j Self-timer)
Freeze the action
Blur the action
Î p.114 (s Shutter-priority AE)
Blur the background
Î p.64 (C Creative Auto)
Keep the background in sharp focus Î p.116 (f Aperture-priority AE)
Adjust the image brightness (exposure)Î p.123 (Exposure compensation)
Shoot in low light
Î p.58, 111 (D Flash photography)
p.98 (ISO speed setting)
Shoot without flash
Î p.63 (7 Flash Off)
p.80 (b Flash off)
Shoot fireworks at night
Î p.120 (Bulb exposure)
Shoot while viewing the LCD monitor Î p.149 (A Live View shooting)
Using Creative Filters
Î p.157 (Creative filters)
Shoot movies
Î p.181 (k Movie shooting)
Image Quality
Shoot with image effects matching the subject Î p.101 (Picture Style)
Make a large-size print of the picture
10
Î p.94 (73, 83, 1)
Take many pictures
Î p.94 (7a, 8a, b, c)
Focusing
Change the point of focus
Î p.105 (S AF point selection)
Shoot a moving subject
Î p.71, 104 (AI Servo AF)
Playback
View the images on the camera Î p.89 (x Playback)
Search for pictures quickly
Î p.242 (H Index display)
p.243 (I Image browsing)
Rate images
Î p.248 (Ratings)
Prevent important images
from accidental deletion
Î p.266 (K Image protect)
Delete unnecessary images
Î p.268 (L Delete)
Auto play images and movies
Î p.258 (Slide show)
View the photos or movies on a TV set Î p.262 (Video OUT)
Adjust the LCD monitor brightness Î p.218 (LCD monitor brightness)
Apply special effect to images
Î p.274 (Creative filters)
Printing
Print pictures easily
Î p.281 (Direct printing)
11
Index to Features
Power
Battery
• Charging
• Installing/Removing
• Battery check
Î p.30
Î p.32
Î p.36
Household power outlet Î p.308
Auto power off
Î p.35
Cards
Installing/Removing
Î p.32
Formatting
Î p.48
Release shutter without cardÎ p.216
Lens
Attaching/Detaching
Î p.40
Zoom
Î p.41
Basic Settings
Dioptric adjustment
Î p.42
Language
Î p.39
Date/Time/Zone
Î p.37
Beeper
Î p.216
LCD Monitor
LCD auto off/on
Î p.230
Brightness adjustment
Î p.218
Touch screen
Î p.53
Recording Images
Creating/Selecting a folder Î p.219
File numbering
Î p.221
Image Quality
Image-recording quality Î p.94
12
Picture Style
Î p.101
White balance
Î p.142
Color space
Î p.146
Image enhancement features
• Auto Lighting Optimizer Î p.130
• Lens peripheral
illumination correction
Î p.134
• Chromatic aberration
correction
Î p.135
• Noise reduction for
long exposures
Î p.132
• Noise reduction for
high ISO speeds
Î p.131
• Highlight tone priority
Î p.301
AF
AF operation
Î p.103
AF point selection
Î p.105
Manual focusing
Î p.107
Drive
Drive mode
Î p.108
Continuous shooting
Î p.108
Self-timer
Î p.110
Maximum burst
Î p.96
Shooting
Shooting mode
Î p.26
ISO speed
Î p.98
Feature guide
Î p.52
Bulb
Î p.120
Mirror lockup
Î p.147
Metering mode
Î p.121
Remote control
Î p.309
Quick Control
Î p.44
Index to Features
Exposure Adjustment
Single-image display
Exposure compensation Î p.123
AEB
Î p.125
AE lock
Î p.127
Flash
Built-in flash
• Flash exposure
compensation
• FE lock
External flash
Î p.111
Î p.124
Î p.128
Î p.311
Live View shooting
Î p.149
Autofocusing (AF) methods Î p.164
Continuous AF
Î p.161
Touch Shutter
Î p.174
Aspect ratio
Î p.162
Grid display
Î p.161
Quick Control
Î p.155
Creative filters
Î p.157
Î p.242
Magnified view
Î p.244
Image rotate
Î p.247
Rating
Î p.248
Movie playback
Î p.254
Editing out movie’s first/
last scene
Î p.256
Slide show
Î p.258
Protect
Î p.266
Erase
Î p.268
Quick Control
Î p.250
Image Editing
Creative filters
Î p.274
Resize
Î p.277
Cropping
Î p.279
Printing
Movie Shooting
Î p.181
Î p.207
Î p.210
Î p.209
Î p.185
Î p.190
Î p.192
Î p.195
Î p.197
Playback
Image review time
Index display
Image browsing (Jump display) Î p.243
Viewing images on a TV set Î p.262
Live View Shooting
Movie shooting
Movie Servo AF
Sound recording
Grid display
Manual exposure
Still photo shooting
Quick Control
Miniature Effect Movies
Video snapshot
Î p.89
Shooting information display Î p.270
Î p.217
PictBridge
Î p.284
Print Order (DPOF)
Î p.291
Photobook Set-up
Î p.295
Customization
Custom Functions (C.Fn) Î p.298
My Menu
Î p.305
Software
Downloading images to a
computer
Î p.363
Software instruction manualsÎ p.361
13
Contents
Introduction
2
Compatible Cards............................................................................. 3
Item Check List................................................................................. 4
Instruction Manual and DVD/CD-ROMs ........................................... 5
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6
Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 8
Chapters........................................................................................... 9
Contents at a Glance...................................................................... 10
Index to Features ........................................................................... 12
Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 20
Nomenclature ................................................................................. 22
1
Getting Started
29
Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 30
Installing and Removing the Battery and Card ............................... 32
Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 35
Setting the Date, Time, and Zone .................................................. 37
Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 39
Attaching and Detaching a Lens .................................................... 40
Basic Operation.............................................................................. 42
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 44
3 Menu Operations.................................................................. 46
Formatting the Card ....................................................................... 48
Switching the LCD Monitor Display ................................................ 50
Feature Guide ................................................................................ 52
d Using the Touch Screen............................................................. 53
14
Contents
2
Basic Shooting and Image Playback
57
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................58
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) ......................... 61
7 Disabling Flash ......................................................................... 63
C Creative Auto Shooting.............................................................64
2 Shooting Portraits ...................................................................... 68
3 Shooting Landscapes ............................................................... 69
4 Shooting Close-ups ................................................................... 70
5 Shooting Moving Subjects ........................................................ 71
8: Special Scene Mode .............................................................72
C Shooting Children ...................................................................... 73
P Shooting Food ............................................................................ 74
x Shooting Candlelight Portraits ...................................................75
6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ....................................76
F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)............................................77
G Shooting Backlit Scenes............................................................ 78
Q Quick Control............................................................................. 80
Shoot by Ambience Selection .........................................................82
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type.................................................... 86
x Image Playback ........................................................................89
3
Creative Shooting
91
d: Program AE...............................................................................92
Setting the Image-Recording Quality .............................................. 94
i: Changing the ISO Speed ....................................................... 98
A Optimal Image Characteristics for the Subject (Picture Style) ...101
f: Changing the Autofocus Operation (AF Operation) ............... 103
S Selecting the AF Point ............................................................ 105
Subjects Difficult to Focus............................................................. 107
MF: Manual Focus .....................................................................107
15
Contents
i Selecting the Drive Mode........................................................ 108
j Using the Self-timer................................................................. 110
D Using the Built-in Flash............................................................. 111
4
Advanced Shooting
113
s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement ..................................... 114
f: Changing the Depth of Field ................................................ 116
Depth of Field Preview............................................................... 118
a: Manual Exposure ................................................................... 119
q Changing the Metering Mode ................................................. 121
Setting Exposure Compensation .................................................. 123
Auto Exposure Bracketing............................................................ 125
A Locking the Exposure ............................................................. 127
A Locking the Flash Exposure.................................................... 128
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast (Auto Lighting Optimizer) ... 130
Setting Noise Reduction ............................................................... 131
Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction .. 134
A Customizing Image Characteristics (Picture Style) .............. 137
A Registering Preferred Image Characteristics (Picture Style)..... 140
Matching the Light Source (White Balance) ................................. 142
u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source ........................ 144
Setting the Color Reproduction Range (Color Space).................. 146
Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Shake ..................................... 147
5
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 149
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor .............................................. 150
Shooting Function Settings .......................................................... 155
U Using Creative Filters ............................................................. 157
A Menu Function Settings ......................................................... 161
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)................................................... 164
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter ............................................ 174
MF: Focusing Manually ................................................................ 176
16
Contents
6
Shooting Movies
181
k Shooting Movies .....................................................................182
Autoexposure Shooting ..............................................................182
Manual Exposure Shooting ........................................................185
Shooting Still Photos ..................................................................190
Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................192
Setting the Movie Recording Size.................................................193
Shooting Miniature Effect Movies .................................................195
Shooting Video Snapshots............................................................ 197
Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 207
7
Handy Features
215
Handy Features ............................................................................216
Disabling the Beeper ..................................................................216
Card Reminder ........................................................................... 216
Setting the Image Review Time .................................................217
Setting the Auto Power-off Time ................................................217
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................... 218
Creating and Selecting a Folder.................................................219
File Numbering Methods ............................................................ 221
Setting Copyright Information..................................................... 223
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ................................................225
Checking Camera Settings ........................................................226
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings............................ 227
Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically......230
Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color...........................230
Setting the Flash ........................................................................... 231
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning....................................................236
Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................237
Manual Sensor Cleaning...............................................................239
17
Contents
8
Image Playback
241
H I Searching for Images Quickly............................................ 242
u/y Magnified View ................................................................... 244
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen ........................................ 245
b Rotating the Image .................................................................. 247
Setting Ratings ............................................................................. 248
Q Quick Control for Playback ..................................................... 250
k Enjoying Movies ..................................................................... 252
k Playing Movies ....................................................................... 254
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 256
Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 258
Viewing Images on a TV Set ........................................................ 262
K Protecting Images................................................................... 266
L Erasing Images........................................................................ 268
B Shooting Information Display............................................. 270
9
Post-Processing Images
273
U Applying Creative Filters......................................................... 274
S Resizing JPEG Images........................................................... 277
N Cropping JPEG Images .......................................................... 279
10
Printing Images
281
Preparing to Print ......................................................................... 282
w Printing ................................................................................... 284
Cropping the Image ................................................................... 289
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ......................................... 291
W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images ................................. 294
p Specifying Images for a Photobook......................................... 295
18
Contents
11
Customizing the Camera
297
Setting Custom Functions............................................................. 298
Custom Function Settings............................................................. 300
C.Fn I: Exposure ........................................................................ 300
C.Fn II: Image ............................................................................301
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive ............................................................ 302
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others.......................................................... 303
Registering My Menu .................................................................... 305
12
Reference
307
Using a Household Power Outlet.................................................. 308
Remote Control Shooting..............................................................309
External Speedlites ....................................................................... 311
H Using Eye-Fi Cards ................................................................. 313
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode .............. 316
System Map .................................................................................. 322
Menu Settings ............................................................................... 324
Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................331
Error Codes...................................................................................343
Specifications................................................................................344
Safety Precautions........................................................................ 353
13
Viewing the DVD-ROM Instruction Manuals /
Downloading Images to Your Computer
359
Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM) 360
Downloading Images to a Computer.............................................363
About the Software ....................................................................... 365
Installing the Software................................................................... 366
14
Quick Reference Guide and Index
369
Quick Reference Guide................................................................. 370
Index ............................................................................................. 382
19
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical
shock.
The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you
accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult the nearest Canon
Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry and clean cloth. If the
camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.
Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and
focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean
the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest
Canon Service Center.
Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent
the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera misoperation.
If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and
battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before
using the camera.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.
Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and
corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera
checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure
it is working properly.
20
Handling Precautions
LCD Monitor
Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels
displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.
Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.
The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures, or look black
in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.
Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field,
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
Store the card in a case.
Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens
with the rear end up and attach the lens caps to avoid
scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.
Contacts
Cautions regarding Prolonged Use
If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or
movie shooting for a prolonged period, the camera may
become hot. This is not a malfunction.
Smudges Adhering to the Front of the Sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare
cases lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the
sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning, having
the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
21
Nomenclature
Built-in flash/AF-assist beam
(p.111/106)
EF Lens mount index (p.40)
EF-S Lens mount index (p.40)
Mode Dial (p.26)
Flash sync contacts
Power switch (p.35)
Hot shoe (p.311)
<i> ISO speed
setting button (p.98)
<D> Flash button
(p.111)
<6> Main Dial
<V> Focal plane
mark (p.70)
Speaker (p.254)
Shutter button
(p.43)
Strap mount
(p.29)
Microphone
(monaural)
(p.182)
Remote control
sensor
(p.147, 309)
Red-eye
reduction/
Self-timer
lamp
(p.112/110)
Grip
Mirror (p.147, 239)
Lens release button
(p.41)
Contacts (p.21)
Lens mount
Lens lock pin
Depth-of-field preview
button (p.118)
<Y> External microphone
IN terminal (p.210)
<F> Remote control terminal
(p.310)
Body cap (p.40)
<q/C>
Audio/video OUT/
Digital terminal (p.265, 282, 364)
<D> HDMI mini OUT
terminal (p.262)
22
Nomenclature
Display-off sensor (p.50, 230)
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.42)
<A> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting button (p.150/182)
Viewfinder eyepiece
<A/Hy> AE lock/
FE lock button/
Index/Reduce button
(p.127/128/242/244, 279, 289)
Eyecup (p.310)
<B> Info button
(p.50, 89, 152, 187, 226)
<S/u>
AF point selection/
Magnify button
(p.105/244, 279, 289)
<M> Menu
button (p.46)
LCD monitor/
Touch screen
(p.46, 217/
53, 245, 255)
Access lamp
(p.33)
DC cord hole
(p.308)
<O> Aperture/
Exposure compensation
button (p.119/123)
Tripod socket
Card slot/
Battery compartment
cover (p.32)
<x> Playback button (p.89)
<W> <X> <Y> <Z>: <S> Cross keys (p.46)
Card slot/
Battery compartment
cover release lever (p.32)
<L> Erase button (p.268)
<Q/0> Quick Control button/
Setting button (p.44/46)
Card slot (p.32)
Battery compartment (p.32)
23
Nomenclature
Shooting Settings (in Creative Zone modes, p.26)
Shutter speed
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation
amount (p.123)
AEB range (p.125)
Aperture
Main Dial pointer
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.130)
ISO speed (p.98)
Highlight tone priority
(p.301)
Shooting mode
Picture Style (p.101)
y Flash exposure
compensation (p.123)
AF operation (p.103)
X
One-Shot AF
9
AI Focus AF
Z
AI Servo AF
MF
Manual Focus
Metering mode (p.121)
q Evaluative metering
w Partial metering
r Spot metering
e Center-weighted
average metering
Image-recording
quality (p.94)
73 Large/Fine
83 Large/Normal
74 Medium/Fine
84 Medium/Normal
7a Small 1/Fine
8a Small 1/Normal
b Small 2 (Fine)
c Small 3 (Fine)
1+73
RAW+Large/Fine
1 RAW
Quick Control icon (p.44)
Battery check (p.36)
zxcn
White balance (p.142)
Q Auto
W Daylight
E Shade
R Cloudy
Y Tungsten light
U White fluorescent light
I Flash
O Custom
Eye-Fi transmission status (p.313)
Drive/Self-timer (p.108, 110)
u Single shooting
i Continuous shooting
B Silent single shooting
M Silent continuous shooting
Q Self-timer:10 sec/Remote control
l Self-timer:2 sec
q Self-timer:Continuous
Number of possible shots
Number of possible shots
during WB bracketing
Self-timer countdown
Multi Shot Noise Reduction (p.131)
u White balance correction (p.144)
B White balance bracketing (p.145)
GPS connection indicator
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
24
Nomenclature
Viewfinder Information
Spot metering circle
AF point activation indicator <•>
Focusing screen
AF points
<i>
ISO speed
<u>
White balance
correction
<A> AE lock/
AEB in-progress
<o> Focus
confirmation light
Max. burst
<D> Flash-ready
Improper FE lock warning
<0> Monochrome
shooting
ISO speed
<e> High-speed sync
(FP flash)
<d> FE lock/FEB in-progress
<y> Flash exposure
compensation
<A> Highlight tone priority
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount
AEB range
Red-eye reduction lamp-on indicator
Aperture
Shutter speed
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Built-in flash recycling (D buSY)
Card full warning (FuLL)
Card error warning (Card)
No card warning (Card)
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
25
Nomenclature
Mode Dial
The Mode Dial includes the Basic Zone modes and Creative Zone
modes.
Creative Zone
These modes give you more control for
shooting various subjects.
d
: Program AE (p.92)
s
: Shutter-priority AE (p.114)
f : Aperture-priority AE (p.116)
a
: Manual exposure (p.119)
Basic Zone
All you do is press the shutter button.
The camera sets everything to suit the
subject or scene.
A : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.58)
7 : Flash Off (p.63)
C : Creative Auto (p.64)
2 : Portrait (p.68)
3 : Landscape (p.69)
4 : Close-up (p.70)
5 : Sports (p.71)
8 : Special scene (p.72)
C : Kids (p.73)
P : Food (p.74)
x : Candlelight (p.75)
6 : Night Portrait (p.76)
F : Handheld Night Scene (p.77)
G : HDR Backlight Control (p.78)
26
Nomenclature
Battery Charger LC-E12
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E12 (p.30).
Power plug
Charge lamp
Full-charge lamp
Battery pack slot
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.
Battery Charger LC-E12E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E12 (p.30).
Battery pack slot
Power cord
Full-charge lamp
Charge lamp
Power cord socket
27
1
Getting Started
This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start
shooting and basic camera operations.
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through
the camera’s strap mount eyelet
from the bottom. Then pass it
through the strap’s buckle as shown
in the illustration. Pull the strap to
take up any slack and make sure
the strap will not loosen from the
buckle.
The eyepiece cover is also
attached to the strap (p.310).
Eyepiece cover
29
Charging the Battery
1
Remove the protective cover.
the battery.
2 Attach
As shown in the illustration, attach the
battery securely to the charger.
To detach the battery, follow the
above procedure in reverse.
LC-E12
the battery.
3 Recharge
For LC-E12
As shown by the arrow, flip out the
battery charger’s prongs and insert
the prongs into a power outlet.
For LC-E12E
LC-E12E
Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into a
power outlet.
X Recharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp lights up in orange.
X When the battery is fully recharged,
the full-charge lamp will light up in
green.
It takes approx. 2 hours to fully recharge a completely
exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time
required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on
the ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /
41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hours).
30
Charging the Battery
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be
used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose
its capacity.
After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small
amount of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge
and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover
(provided) attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may
lower the battery’s performance.
The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/
60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available
plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any
portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can
damage the battery charger.
If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Purchase a new battery.
After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
at least 3 sec.
Do not charge any battery other than a Battery Pack LP-E12.
Battery Pack LP-E12 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with
an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
31
Installing and Removing the Battery and Card
Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E12 into the camera. The camera
can use an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory card (sold separately). UHS-I
Speed Class SDHC and SDXC memory cards can also be used. The
captured images are recorded onto the card.
Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to
enable writing/erasing.
Installing the Card
1
Open the cover.
Slide the lever as shown by the
arrows and open the cover.
the battery.
2 Insert
Insert the end with the battery
contacts.
Insert the battery until it locks in
place.
Write-protect switch
the card.
3 Insert
As shown by the illustration, face the
card’s label side toward the back of
the camera and insert it until it clicks
in place.
the cover.
4 Close
Press the cover until it snaps shut.
When you set the power switch to
<1>, the number of possible shots
(p.36) will be displayed on the LCD
monitor.
32
Installing and Removing the Battery and Card
After opening the card slot/battery compartment cover, be careful not to
swing it back further. Otherwise, the hinge may break.
The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the
card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.
Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
you from forgetting to insert a card (p.216).
Removing the Card
the power switch to <2>
1 Set
(p.35).
the cover.
2 Open
Make sure the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
If [Recording...] is displayed, close
the cover.
the battery.
3 Remove
Press the battery lock lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
To prevent short circuiting of the
battery contacts, be sure to attach the
provided protective cover (p.30) to
the battery.
the card.
4 Remove
Gently push in the card, then let go to
eject it.
Pull the card straight out.
the cover.
5 Close
Press the cover until it snaps shut.
33
Installing and Removing the Battery and Card
When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to or read by the card, being erased, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot/battery compartment cover.
Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.221).
If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all
the images and then format the card with the camera (p.48). The card
may then return to normal.
Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.
34
Turning on the Power
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting
screen appears, see page 37 to set the date/time/zone.
<k>
<1>
<2>
: The camera turns on. You can
shoot movies (p.181).
: The camera turns on. You can
shoot still photos.
: The camera is turned off and
does not operate. Set to this
position when not using the
camera.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, sensor
cleaning will be executed automatically. (A small sound may be
heard.) During the sensor cleaning, the LCD monitor will display
<f>.
You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter
button halfway (p.43) to stop the sensor cleaning and take a picture.
If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a malfunction.
3 Auto Power Off
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after
approx. 30 seconds of non-operation. To turn on the camera again,
just press the shutter button halfway (p.43).
You can set the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]
(p.217).
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
card finishes recording the image.
35
Turning on the Power
z Checking the Battery Level
When the power is turned on, the battery level will be indicated in one of
four levels.
z : Battery level is sufficient.
x : Battery level is low, but the
camera can still be used.
c : Battery will be exhausted soon.
(Blinks)
n : Recharge the battery.
Number of Possible Shots
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
No Flash
Approx. 480 shots
Approx. 420 shots
50% Flash Use
Approx. 380 shots
Approx. 350 shots
The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E12, no Live
View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing
standards.
The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor often.
The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on
the lens used, the number of possible shots may be lower.
For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 151.
36
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone
have been reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow
the steps below to set the time zone first. If you set the camera to the
correct time zone for where you currently live, when you travel to another
time zone you can simply set the camera to the correct time zone for
your destination to update the camera’s date/time automatically.
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.
1
Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select [Date/
2 Under
Time/Zone].
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the [52] tab.
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[Date/Time/Zone], then press
<0>.
the time zone.
3 Set[London]
is set by default.
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the time zone box.
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the time zone, then press <0>.
(Returns to <s>.)
The menu setting procedure is explained on pages 46-47.
In step 3, the time displayed on the upper right of the screen is the time
difference compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do
not see your time zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference
with UTC.
37
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
the date and time.
4 SetPress
the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the number.
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Press the <W> <X> keys to set the
number, then press <0>. (Returns
to <s>.)
saving time.
5 SetSettheit ifdaylight
necessary.
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[Y].
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[Z], then press <0>.
When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 4 will
advance by 1 hour. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hour.
the setting.
6 ExitPress
the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[OK], then press <0>.
X The date/time/zone and daylight
saving time will be set and the menu
will reappear.
If you store the camera without the battery or if the camera’s battery
becomes exhausted, the date/time/zone may be reset. If this happens, set
the time zone and date/time again.
The date/time that was set will start from when you press <0> in step 6.
After changing the time zone, check that the correct date/time has been
set.
38
3 Selecting the Interface Language
1
Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select
2 Under
[LanguageK].
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the [52] tab.
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[LanguageK], then press <0>.
the desired language.
3 SetPress
the <S> cross keys to select
the language, then press <0>.
X The interface language will change.
39
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with all Canon EF and EF-S lenses. The
camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
1
Remove the caps.
Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
the lens.
2 Attach
Align the lens’ red or white index with
White index
the camera’s index matching the
same color. Turn the lens as shown
by the arrow until it clicks in place.
Red index
the lens focus mode switch to
3 Set
<AF>.
<AF> stands for autofocus.
If it is set to <MF> (manual focus),
autofocus will not operate.
4 Remove the front lens cap.
Minimizing Dust
When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
40
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Zooming
To zoom, turn the zoom ring on the lens
with your fingers.
If you want to zoom, do it before
focusing. Turning the zoom ring after
achieving focus may throw off the
focus.
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrows.
Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
If you use a TS-E lens, certain shift and rotation functions may be
restricted, and attaching or detaching the lens may also be restricted.
Image Conversion Factor
Since the image sensor size is
smaller than the 35mm film
format, it will look like the lens
focal length is increased by
approx. 1.6x.
Image sensor size (Approx.)
(22.3 x 14.9 mm / 0.88 x 0.59 in.)
35mm image size
(36 x 24 mm / 1.42 x 0.94 in.)
41
Basic Operation
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment
knob.
Turn the knob left or right so that the
AF points (nine boxes) in the
viewfinder look sharp.
If the camera dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (sold separately) is
recommended.
Holding the Camera
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera
shake.
Horizontal shooting
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Vertical shooting
Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 149.
42
Basic Operation
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
(0).
Pressing completely
This releases the shutter and takes the
picture.
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first,
or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely
immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can
instantly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button
halfway.
43
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor. This is called the Quick Control screen.
1
Press the <Q> button.
X The Quick Control screen will appear
(7).
the desired function.
2 SetPress
the <S> cross keys to select a
function.
X The selected function and Feature
guide (p.52) will appear.
Turn the <6> dial to change the
setting.
Basic Zone modes
Creative Zone modes
the picture.
3 TakePress
the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
X The captured image will be displayed.
For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and the setting
procedure, see page 80.
In steps 1 and 2, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen
(p.53).
44
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Sample Quick Control Screen
White balance correction (p.144)
Shutter speed (p.114)
Shooting mode* (p.26)
Aperture (p.116)
Highlight tone priority* (p.301)
ISO speed (p.98)
Exposure compensation/
AEB setting (p.123, 125)
Flash exposure
compensation (p.124)
Picture Style (p.101)
Metering mode (p.121)
White balance
(p.142)
AF operation (p.103)
Image-recording quality
(p.94)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
(p.130)
Return
Drive/self-timer (p.108, 110)
White balance bracketing (p.145)
* These functions cannot be set with the Quick Control screen.
Function Setting Screen
Ð <0>
Select the desired function and press
<0>. The function’s setting screen
will appear.
Press the <Y><Z> keys or turn the
<6> dial to change some of the
settings. Also, some functions can be
set by pressing the <B> button.
Press <0> to finalize the setting
and return to the Quick Control
screen.
45
3 Menu Operations
You can set various settings with the menus such as the imagerecording quality, date/time, etc. While looking at the LCD monitor, use
the <M> button, <S> cross keys, and <0> button on the back of
the camera to operate the menus.
<M> button
<0> button
<S> cross keys
LCD monitor
Menu Screen
The menu tabs and items displayed will differ depending on the shooting mode.
Basic Zone modes
Movie shooting
Creative Zone modes
3 Playback
A Live View shooting
z Shooting
5 Set-up
9 My Menu
Tab
Menu settings
Menu items
46
3 Menu Operations
Menu Setting Procedure
1
Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
a tab.
2 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a
tab (group of functions).
For example, in this manual, “the [z3]
tab” refers to the screen displayed
when the third z (Shooting) tab from
the left [
] is selected.
the desired item.
3 Select
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the option, then press <0>.
the setting.
4 Select
Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys
to select the desired setting. (Some settings
require you to press either the <W> <X>
or <Y> <Z> keys to select it.)
The current setting is indicated in blue.
the desired setting.
5 SetPress
<0> to set it.
the setting.
6 ExitPress
the <M> button to return to
the shooting function settings display.
In step 2, you can also turn the <6> dial to select a menu tab.
In steps 2 to 5, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen (p.53).
The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
To cancel, press the <M> button.
For details about each menu item, see page 324.
47
3 Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with the camera.
When the card is formatted, all images and data in the card will
be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make
sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer
the images and data to a computer, etc., before formatting the
card.
1
Select [Format card].
Under the [51] tab, select [Format
card], then press <0>.
the card.
2 Format
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X The card will be formatted.
X When the formatting is completed,
the menu will reappear.
For low-level formatting, press the
<L> button to append [Low level
format] with a checkmark <X>, then
select [OK].
48
3 Formatting the Card
Execute [Format card] in the following cases:
The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full with images or data.
A card-related error is displayed (p.343).
Low-level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting if the card’s recording or reading speed seems
slow or if you want to totally erase data in the card.
Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors in the card, the
formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.
You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this
case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the card as
usual.
When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to
prevent the personal data from being leaked.
Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software in the card must be
installed in your computer. Then format the card with the camera.
The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
49
Switching the LCD Monitor Display
The LCD monitor can display the shooting settings screen, menu
screen, captured images, etc.
Shooting Settings
When you turn on the power, the
shooting settings will be displayed.
When your eye is near the viewfinder
eyepiece, the display-off sensor
(p.23, 230) will turn off the LCD
monitor to prevent glare. When your
eye leaves the viewfinder eyepiece,
the LCD monitor will turn on again.
By pressing the <B> button, you
can switch the LCD monitor screen
as follows: Display the shooting
settings screen (p.24), turn off the
LCD monitor screen, or display the
camera settings screen (p.226).
Menu Functions
Appears when you press the
<M> button. Press the
button again to return to the
shooting settings screen.
50
Captured Image
Appears when you press the
<x> button. Press the button
again to return to the shooting
settings screen.
Switching the LCD Monitor Display
With [52: LCD auto off], you can prevent the LCD monitor from turning
off automatically (p.230).
Even when the menu screen or captured image is displayed, pressing
the shutter button will enable you to shoot immediately.
If you look through the viewfinder eyepiece while wearing sunglasses,
the LCD monitor may not turn off automatically. If this occurs, press the
<B> button to turn off the LCD monitor.
Nearby fluorescent lighting may cause the LCD monitor to turn off. If this
occurs, take the camera away from the fluorescent lighting.
51
Feature Guide
The Feature guide appears when you change the shooting mode or set
a shooting function, Live View shooting, movie shooting, or Quick
Control for playback, and displays a brief description of that mode,
function or option. It also displays a description when you select a
function or option on the Quick Control screen. The Feature guide turns
off when you tap the description or proceed with the operation.
Shooting mode (Sample)
Quick Control (Sample)
Shooting settings
Live View shooting
Playback
3 Disabling the Feature Guide
Select [Feature guide].
Under the [53] tab, select [Feature
guide], then press <0>.
Select [Disable], then press <0>.
52
d Using the Touch Screen
The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can operate with
your fingers.
Tap
Quick Control (Sample display)
Use your finger to tap (touch briefly
and then remove your finger from) the
LCD monitor.
By tapping, you can select menus,
icons, etc., displayed on the LCD
monitor.
When touch-screen operation is
possible, a frame will appear around
the icon (except on menu screens).
For example, when you tap [Q], the
Quick Control screen appears. By
tapping [2], you can return to the
preceding screen.
Operations possible by tapping the screen
Setting menu functions after pressing the <M> button
Quick Control
Setting functions after pressing the <i> or <S> button
Setting functions during Live View shooting
Setting functions during movie shooting
Playback operations
53
d Using the Touch Screen
Drag
Menu screen (Sample display)
Slide your finger while touching the
LCD monitor.
Scale display (Sample display)
Operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen
Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <M> button
Setting a scale control
Quick Control
Setting functions during Live View shooting
Setting functions during movie shooting
Playback operations
3 Silencing the Beep during Touch Operations
If [z1: Beep] is set to [Touch to
beep will not sound during touch
operations.
54
], the
d Using the Touch Screen
3 Setting the Touch Control
1
Select [Touch control].
Under the [53] tab, select [Touch
control], then press <0>.
the Touch control.
2 SetSelect
the desired setting, then press
<0>.
[Standard] is the normal setting.
[Sensitive] provides a better touch
response than [Standard]. Try using
both settings and select the one you
prefer.
To disable touch-screen operations,
select [Disable].
Cautions for Touch Screen Operations
Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp
objects, such as your fingernail or a ballpoint pen, for touch operations.
Do not use wet fingers for touch screen operations.
If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the touch
screen may not respond or misoperation may occur. In such a case, turn
off the power and wipe the LCD monitor with a cloth.
Do not attach any protective sheet (commercially available) or sticker on
the LCD monitor. It may make the touch operation response slow.
55
2
Basic Shooting and
Image Playback
This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes
on the Mode Dial for best results and how to play back
images.
With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot while the
camera sets everything automatically (p.81, 316). Also, to
prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations,
advanced shooting function settings cannot be changed.
e
Basic Zon
If you set the Mode Dial to <8> while the LCD monitor is off,
press the <Q> button to check the shooting mode before shooting
(p.72).
57
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus
automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.61).
1
AF point
Set the Mode Dial to <A>.
any AF point over the
2 Aim
subject.
All the AF points will be used to focus,
and generally the closest object will
be focused.
Aiming the center AF point over the
subject will make focusing easier.
the subject.
3 Focus
Press the shutter button halfway, and
the lens focusing ring will rotate to
focus.
X The dot inside the AF point achieving
focus flashes briefly in red. At the
same time, the beeper will sound and
the focus confirmation light <o> in
the viewfinder will light up.
X If necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised automatically.
Focus confirmation light
58
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
the picture.
4 TakePress
the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
X The captured image will be displayed
for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.
After you finish shooting, push down
the built-in flash with your fingers.
The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained, use a Creative
Zone mode and select a Picture Style other than <D> and shoot (p.101).
FAQ
The focus confirmation light <o> blinks and focus is not
achieved.
Aim the AF point over an area with good contrast, then press the
shutter button halfway (p.43). If you are too close to the subject,
move away and try again.
Multiple AF points flash simultaneously.
This indicates that focus is achieved at all those AF points. When the
AF point covering the desired subject flashes, take the picture.
The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus confirmation
light <o> does not light up.)
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving
subject. (The focus confirmation light <o> does not light up.) You
can take sharp pictures of a moving subject.
Note that focus lock (p.61) will not work in this case.
Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),
set it to <AF> (autofocus).
59
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
The flash fired even though it was daylight.
For a backlit subject, the flash may fire to help lighten the subject’s
dark areas. There are two ways to disable the flash:
• Set the flash setting to [b] (Flash off). If you change the shooting
mode or set the power switch to <2>, the setting will revert back
to [a] (Auto flash) (p.81).
• Set the Mode Dial to <7> (Flash Off) (p.63).
The flash fired and the picture came out extremely bright.
Move further from the subject and shoot. When shooting flash
photography, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture
may come out extremely bright (overexposure).
In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.
Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to
fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called AF-assist
beam. Its effective range is approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.
When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out
unnaturally dark.
The shadow of the lens barrel was captured in the picture because
the subject was too close to the camera. Move further from the
subject and shoot. If a hood is attached to the lens, remove it before
taking the flash picture.
60
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to
create a balanced background and good perspective.
In the <A> mode, while you press the shutter button halfway to focus
a still subject, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the
shot and press the shutter button completely to take the picture. This is
called “focus lock”. Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone
modes (except <5><C>).
Shooting a Moving Subject
In the <A> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)
while or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus the subject
continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long as you
keep aiming the AF point on the subject while pressing the shutter
button halfway, the focusing will be continuous. When you want to take
the picture, press the shutter button completely.
61
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
A Live View Shooting
You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is
called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 149.
1
Display the Live View image on
the LCD monitor.
Press the <A> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
the subject.
2 Focus
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
the picture.
3 TakePress
the shutter button completely.
X The picture will be taken and the
captured image is displayed on the
LCD monitor.
X After the image review ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
Press the <A> button to end the
Live View shooting.
62
7 Disabling Flash
The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings
automatically. In places where flash photography is prohibited such as
in a museum or an aquarium, use the <7> (Flash Off) mode.
Shooting Tips
Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the viewfinder
blinks.
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the
viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady
or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to
reduce blur caused by camera shake even while handholding the
camera.
Take portraits without flash.
In low-light conditions, tell the subject to keep still until the picture is
taken. Any movement by the subject during shooting may result in
the subject being blurred in the picture.
63
C Creative Auto Shooting
In the <C> mode, you can set the following functions before shooting:
(1) Extra Effect Shot, (2) Ambience-based shots, (3) Background blur,
(4) Drive/self-timer mode, and (5) Flash firing. The default settings are
the same as the <A> mode.
* CA stands for Creative Auto.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <C>.
the <Q> button. (7)
2 Press
X The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired function.
3 SetPress
the <S> cross keys to select
the function.
X The selected function and Feature
guide (p.52) will appear.
Press <0> to set the function.
For the setting procedure and details
on each function, see page 65.
the picture.
4 TakePress
the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
64
C Creative Auto Shooting
(1)
Shutter speed
Aperture
ISO speed
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
Pressing the <Q> button enables you to set the following: If you
set (1), (2) or (3) when the camera is set for Live View shooting, you can
see the effect on the screen before you start shooting.
(1) Extra Effect Shot
• You can select any of the following effects before shooting: Creative
filters (p.157), Picture Styles (p.101), and Ambience-based shots (p.82).
• Turn the <6> dial to select [ : Enable]. Tap on [2] to return to
the Quick Control screen. You can also press <0> and make
the selection.
• Turn the <6> dial to select a shooting effect.
• When you take a picture, two images will be recorded. One with the
effect applied and one without. Immediately after you take a picture,
both images will be displayed together. The image without the effect
is displayed on the left and the one with the effect will be on the right.
Registering your favorite shooting effects
• During the image review immediately after shooting and during
playback, the image applied with the effect will have the < > icon.
After you press the <O> button and then the <B> button,
you can check which shooting effect was applied.
• You can register up to two shooting effects under [9:Favorite effect].
• When you select the registered [9:Favorite effect], you can
shoot with that shooting effect applied. You can also overwrite the
[9:Favorite effect].
If you are using an Eye-Fi card and have set it to erase images after their
transfer, the image without the effect will not be displayed during the
playback immediately after shooting.
65
C Creative Auto Shooting
(2) Ambience-based shots
• You can choose the ambience you want to convey in your images.
• Turn the <6> dial to select the ambience. You can also select it
from a list by pressing <0>. For details, see page 82.
(3) Background blur
• If [OFF] is set, the degree of background blur will change
depending on the brightness.
• If it is set to other than [OFF], you can adjust the background blur
regardless of brightness.
• If you turn the <6> dial to move the cursor to the right, the
background will look sharper.
• Turning the <6> dial to move the cursor to the left will blur the
subject’s background. Note that depending on the lens’ maximum
aperture (f/number), certain slider adjustments may not be
selectable (indicated by •).
• If you use Live View shooting, you can see how the image is
blurred in front of and behind the point of focus. While you turn the
<6> dial, [Simulating blur] will be displayed on the LCD
monitor.
• If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting Portraits” on
page 68.
• Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background
may not look so blurred.
• This function cannot be set if you use flash. If <a> has been set
and you set Background blur, <b> will be set automatically.
If [Simulating blur] is effective during Live View shooting, the image
shown while <g> (p.152) is blinking may have more noise than the
actual image being recorded or it may look dark.
You cannot set both (1) Extra Effect Shot and (2) Ambience-based shots
at the same time.
You cannot set both (1) Extra Effect Shot and (3) Background blur at the
same time.
66
C Creative Auto Shooting
(4) Drive/self-timer mode: Use the <6> dial to make the selection.
You can also select it from a list by pressing <0>.
<u> Single shooting:
Shoot one image at a time.
<i> Continuous shooting:
While you hold down the shutter button completely,
shots will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to
approx. 4 shots per second.
<Q> Self-timer: 10sec./remote control:
The picture is taken 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button. A remote controller can also be used.
<l>Self-timer: 2 sec.:
The picture is taken 2 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
<q>Self-timer: Continuous:
Press the <W> <X> keys to set the number of
multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer.
10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set
number of multiple shots will be taken.
(5) Flash firing: Turn the <6> dial to select the desired setting. You
can also select it from a list by pressing <0>.
<a> Auto flash : The flash fires automatically when necessary.
<I> Flash on : The flash fires at all times.
<b> Flash off : The flash is disabled.
When using the self-timer, see the
notes on page 110.
When using <b>, see “Disabling Flash” on page 63.
If you have set Extra Effect Shot, <i> <q> cannot be set.
If you have set Background blur, you cannot use flash.
67
2 Shooting Portraits
The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human
subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.
Shooting Tips
The further the distance between the subject and background,
the better.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the
more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand
out better against an uncluttered dark background.
Use a telephoto lens.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with
the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.
Focus the face.
Check that the AF point covering the face flashes. For close-ups of
the face, focus on the eyes.
The default setting is <i> (Continuous shooting). If you hold down the
shutter button, you can shoot continuously to capture subtle changes in the
subject’s pose and facial expression (max. approx. 4 shots/sec.).
68
3 Shooting Landscapes
Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery or to have
everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and
very sharp and crisp images.
Shooting Tips
With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.
When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens, objects near and far
will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth
to landscapes.
Shooting night scenes.
The <3> mode is also good for night scenes because it disables
the built-in flash. Use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
The flash will not fire even in backlit or low-light conditions.
69
4 Shooting Close-ups
When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the <4>
(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a
macro lens (sold separately).
Shooting Tips
Use a simple background.
A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out
better.
Move as close as possible to the subject.
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses
have indications such as <40.25m/0.8ft> on them. The lens
minimum focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal
plane) mark on the top of the camera to the subject. If you are too
close to the subject, the focus confirmation light <o> will blink.
If you use flash and the bottom of the picture looks unusually dark,
move away from the subject.
With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the
subject look larger.
70
5 Shooting Moving Subjects
Use the <5> (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a
running person or a moving vehicle.
Shooting Tips
Use a telephoto lens.
The use of a telephoto lens is recommended for shooting from a
distance.
Use the center AF point to focus.
Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter
button halfway to autofocus. During autofocusing, the beeper will
continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the focus
confirmation light <o> will blink.
The default setting is <i> (Continuous shooting). When you want
to take the picture, press the shutter button completely. If you hold
down the shutter button, you will be able to maintain autofocusing
during continuous shooting of the subject’s movement (max. approx.
4 shots per sec.).
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder’s
shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera steady
and shoot.
71
8: Special Scene Mode
The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when
you select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <8>.
the <Q> button. (7)
2 Press
X The Quick Control screen will appear.
a shooting mode.
3 Select
Press the <S> cross keys to select
the desired shooting mode’s icon.
Turn the <6> dial to select a
shooting mode.
You can also select the shooting
mode icon and press <0> to
display a selection of shooting modes
from which you can select one.
Available Shooting Modes in the <8> Mode
Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Page
6
Night Portrait
Page
p.76
p.74
F
Handheld Night Scene
p.77
p.75
G
HDR Backlight Control
p.78
C
Kids
p.73
P
Food
x
Candlelight
72
C Shooting Children
When you want to continuously focus and shoot children running
around, use <C> (Kids). Skin tones will look healthy.
Shooting Tips
Use the center AF point to focus.
Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter
button halfway to autofocus. During autofocusing, the beeper will
continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the focus
confirmation light <o> will blink.
Shoot continuously.
The default setting is <i> (Continuous shooting). When you want
to take the picture, press the shutter button completely. If you hold
down the shutter button, you will be able to maintain autofocusing
during continuous shooting of the subject’s changing facial
expressions and movement (max. approx. 4 shots per sec.).
While the flash is recycling, “DbuSY” is displayed in the viewfinder, and a
picture cannot be taken. Take the picture after this display turns off.
73
P Shooting Food
When shooting food, use <P> (Food). The photo will look bright and
vivid, making the food look delicious.
Shooting Tips
Change the color tone.
You can change [Color tone]. Food photos with a reddish tinge
usually make the food look more delicious. To increase the food’s
reddish tinge, set it toward [Warm tone]. Set it toward [Cool tone] if
it looks too red.
Avoid using flash.
If you use flash, the light may reflect off the dish or food and results
in unnatural shadows. By default, <b> (Flash off) is set. Try to
prevent camera shake when shooting in low-light conditions.
Since this mode sets the color tone to make food look delicious, human
subjects may be shot in an unsuitable skin tone.
If you use flash, the [Color tone] setting will switch to the default setting.
74
x Shooting Candlelight Portraits
When shooting a human subject in candlelight, use <x> (Candlelight).
The candlelight color tones will be retained in the photo.
Shooting Tips
Use the center AF point to focus.
Aim the center AF point in the viewfinder over the subject, then shoot.
Prevent camera shake if the shutter speed in the viewfinder
blinks.
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the
viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady
or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to
reduce blur caused by camera shake even while handholding the
camera.
Change the color tone.
You can change [Color tone]. To increase the candlelight’s reddish
tinge, set it toward [Warm tone]. Set it toward [Cool tone] if it looks
too red.
Live View shooting cannot be used.
Flash shooting is not possible. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be
emitted (p.106).
75
6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)
To shoot people at night and obtain a natural-looking night scene in the
background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode. Using a tripod is
recommended.
Shooting Tips
Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide
night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
Check the subject’s brightness.
Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a
good exposure of the subject.
It is recommended to play back the image after the shooting to
check the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move nearer
and shoot again.
Also shoot in another shooting modes.
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also
with <A> and <F> is recommended.
Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.
If you use the self-timer together with flash, the self-timer lamp will light
up briefly after the picture is taken.
See the cautions on page 79.
76
F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)
Using a tripod when shooting a night scene gives the best results.
However, the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot
night scenes even while handholding the camera. Four shots are taken
continuously for each picture, and the resulting image with reduced
camera shake is recorded.
Shooting Tips
Hold the camera firmly.
While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,
four shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if
there is significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to
camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.
For shots of people, turn on the flash.
If you want to include people in the night scene shot, press the <Q>
button to set <D> (Flash on). To take a nice portrait, the first shot will
use flash. Tell the subject not to move until all four continuous shots
are taken.
See the cautions on page 79.
77
G Shooting Backlit Scenes
When shooting a scene having both bright and dark areas, use the
<G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this
mode, three continuous shots are taken at different exposures. This
results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the
blocked-up shadows caused by backlighting.
Shooting Tips
Hold the camera firmly.
While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,
three shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if
there is significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to
camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.
Flash shooting is not possible. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be
emitted (p.106).
See the cautions on page 79.
HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
78
Cautions for both <6> (Night Portrait) and <F> (Handheld Night Scene)
During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus dots of light such as
in a night scene. In such a case, you should set the AF method to [Quick
mode] and shoot. If it is still difficult to focus, set the lens’ focus mode
switch to <MF> and focus manually.
Cautions for <F> (Handheld Night Scene)
When shooting flash photography, if the subject is too close to the
camera, the picture may come out extremely bright (overexposure).
If you use flash to shoot a night scene with few lights, the shots may not
align correctly. This can result in a blurry photo.
If you use flash and the human subject is close to the background that is
also illuminated by the flash, the shots may not align correctly. This can
result in a blurry photo. Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors may
also appear.
External flash coverage:
• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the zoom
position will be fixed to the wide end, regardless of the lens’ zoom position.
• If you have to set the flash coverage manually, set it to the wide-angle end.
Cautions for <G> (HDR Backlight Control)
Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have significant noise.
HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit
scenes or extremely high-contrast scenes.
Cautions for both <F> (Handheld Night Scene) and <G> (HDR
Backlight Control)
Compared with other shooting modes, the shooting area will be smaller.
1+73 or 1 cannot be selected. If 1+73 or 1 has been set,
73 will be set.
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly
misaligned due to camera shake.
Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal
shooting. During the processing of the images, “BUSY” will be displayed
and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.
If the shooting mode is set to <F> or <G>, direct printing is not possible.
79
Q Quick Control
In Basic Zone modes when the shooting function settings screen is
displayed, you can press the <Q> button to display the Quick Control
screen. The table on the next page shows the functions that can be set
with the Quick Control screen in each Basic Zone mode.
Example: Portrait mode
the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone
1 Set
mode.
the <Q> button. (7)
2 Press
X The Quick Control screen will appear.
the functions.
3 SetPress
the <S> cross keys to select a
function. (This step is not necessary
in the 7 mode.)
X The selected function and Feature
guide (p.52) will appear.
Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<6> dial to change the setting.
In the <P> and <x> modes, you can set [Color tone]. To suit the light
source, set it toward [Warm tone] to increase the reddish tinge. Set it
toward [Cool tone] if the color tone looks too red.
80
Q Quick Control
Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes
o:
Default setting k: User selectable
Function
Drive mode
(p.108)
Self-timer
(p.110)
u: Single shooting
i: Continuous shooting
Q (10 sec.)
l (2 sec.)
q (Continuous)
a: Automatic firing
Flash firing
D: Flash on (Fires at all times)
b: Flash off
A
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
7
o
k
k
k
k
o
Ambience-based shots (p.82)
C
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
Light/scene-based shots (p.86)
2
k
o
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
: Not selectable
3
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
4
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
5
k
o
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
Background blur (p.66)
Color tone
k
Extra Effect Shot (p.65)
Function
Drive mode
(p.108)
Self-timer
(p.110)
u: Single shooting
i: Continuous shooting
Q (10 sec.)
l (2 sec.)
q (Continuous)
a: Automatic firing
Flash firing
D: Flash on (Fires at all times)
b: Flash off
Ambience-based shots (p.82)
Light/scene-based shots (p.86)
C
k
o
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
P
o
k
k
k
k
8
x
6
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
o
k
o
k
k
k
k
F
o
k
k
k
k
G
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
o
Background blur (p.66)
Color tone
Extra Effect Shot (p.65)
* If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, it will revert
to the default settings (except the self-timer).
81
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Except in the <A>, <7>, and <G> Basic Zone modes, you can
select the ambience for shooting.
Ambience
Standard setting
Vivid
Soft
Warm
Intense
Cool
Brighter
Darker
Monochrome
C/2/3/
4/5
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
1
8
C/6/F P/x
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Ambience Effect
No setting
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
k
k
k
Low / Medium / High
Low / Medium / High
Blue / B/W / Sepia
Set the Mode Dial to any of the
following modes: <C>, <2>,
<3>, <4>, <5>, or <8>.
If the shooting mode is <8>, set
one of the following: <C>, <P>,
<x>, <6>, or <F>.
the Live View image.
2 Display
Press the <A> button to display the
Live View image (except <x>).
the Quick Control screen,
3 On
select the desired ambience.
Press the <Q> button (7).
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[
Standard setting]. [Ambiencebased shots] will appear on the
screen.
82
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<6> dial to select the ambience.
X The LCD monitor will display how the
image will look with the selected
ambience.
the ambience effect.
4 SetPress
the <W> <X> keys to select
the effect bar so that [Effect] appears
at the bottom.
Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<6> dial to select the desired
effect.
the picture.
5 TakePress
the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the <A> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to [
Standard setting].
The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not
look exactly the same as the actual photo.
Using flash may minimize the ambience effect.
In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the LCD monitor may
not have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the actual photo.
Set [52: LCD brightness] to 4 and look at the Live View image while the
LCD monitor is unaffected by outside light.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1 and set [Ambience-based
shots] and [Effect].
83
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Ambience Settings
Standard setting
Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode.
Note that <2> has image characteristics geared for portraits and
<3> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of
the respective shooting mode’s image characteristics.
Vivid
The subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more
impressive than with [
Standard setting].
Soft
The subject will look softer and more dainty. Good for portraits, pets,
flowers, etc.
Warm
The subject will look softer with warmer colors. Good for portraits,
pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look.
Intense
While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is
emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living
subject stand out more.
Cool
The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A
subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive.
84
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Brighter
The picture will look brighter.
Darker
The picture will look darker.
Monochrome
The picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome
color to be black and white, sepia, or blue. When [Monochrome] is
selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.
85
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
In the <2>, <3>, <4>, <5>, and <C> Basic Zone modes, you can
shoot while the settings match the lighting or scene type. Normally, [
Default setting] is adequate, but if the settings match the lighting
condition or scene, the picture will look more accurate to your eye.
For Live View shooting, if you set both [Light/scene-based shots] and
[Ambience-based shots] (p.82), you should first set [Light/scenebased shots]. This will make it easier to see the resulting effect on the
LCD monitor.
8
Lighting or scene 2
3
4 5
Default setting
k
k
k
k
k
Daylight
k
k
k
k
k
Shade
k
k
k
k
k
Cloudy
k
k
k
k
k
Tungsten light
k
k
k
k
Fluorescent light
k
k
k
k
Sunset
k
k
k
k
k
1
C
Set the Mode Dial to any of the
following modes: <2>, <3>,
<4>, <5>, or <8>.
For <8>, set it to <C>.
the Live View image.
2 Display
Press the <A> button to display the
Live View image.
86
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
the Quick Control screen,
3 On
select the lighting or scene type.
Press the <Q> button (7).
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[
Default setting]. [Light/scenebased shots] will appear on the
screen.
Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<6> dial to select the lighting or
scene type.
X The resulting image with the selected
lighting or scene type will be
displayed.
the picture.
4 TakePress
the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the <A> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to [
Default
setting].
If you use flash, the setting will switch to [
Default setting]. (However,
the shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that was set.)
If you want to set this together with [Ambience-based shots], set the
lighting or scene type that best matches the ambience you have set. In
the case of [Sunset], for example, warm colors will become prominent so
the ambience you set may not work well.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1 and set [Light/scene-based
shots].
87
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
Lighting or Scene Type Settings
Default setting
Default setting suited for most subjects.
Daylight
For subjects under sunlight. Gives more natural-looking blue skies
and greenery and reproduces light-colored flowers better.
Shade
For subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones, which may look
too bluish, and for light-colored flowers.
Cloudy
For subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and
landscapes, which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day, look
warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.
Tungsten light
For subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange
color cast caused by tungsten lighting.
Fluorescent light
For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of
fluorescent lighting.
Sunset
Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.
88
x Image Playback
The easiest way to play back images is explained below. For more
details on the playback procedure, see page 241.
1
Play back the image.
Press the <x> button.
X The last captured image or last image
played back will appear.
an image.
2 Select
To view images starting with the last
image, press the <Y> key.
To view images starting with the first
(oldest) image, press the <Z> key.
Each time you press the <B>
button, the display format will change.
No information
With basic information
Histogram
Shooting information display
the image playback.
3 ExitPress
the <x> button to exit the
image playback and return to the
shooting settings display.
89
3
Creative Shooting
In the Basic Zone modes, to prevent spoiled shots,
most advanced functions are set automatically and
cannot be changed. In the <d> (Program AE) mode,
you can set various functions and be more creative.
In the <d> mode, the camera sets the shutter speed and
aperture automatically to obtain a standard exposure.
The difference between the Basic Zone modes and <d> is
explained on pages 316-319.
The functions explained in this chapter can also be used in
the <s>, <f>, and <a> modes explained in Chapter
4.
The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes
(p.26).
* <d> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
91
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
the subject.
2 Focus
Look through the viewfinder and aim
the selected AF point over the
subject. Then press the shutter button
halfway.
X The dot inside the AF point achieving
focus lights up briefly in red, and the
focus confirmation light <o> on the
viewfinder’s bottom right lights up (in
One-Shot AF mode).
X The shutter speed and aperture will
be set automatically and displayed in
the viewfinder.
the display.
3 Check
A standard exposure will be obtained
as long as the shutter speed and
aperture display do not blink.
the picture.
4 TakeCompose
the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
92
d: Program AE
Shooting Tips
Change the ISO speed. Use the built-in flash.
To match the subject and ambient lighting level, you can change the
ISO speed (p.98) or use the built-in flash (p.111). In the <d> mode,
the built-in flash will not fire automatically. In indoors or during low
light shooting, you should therefore press the <I> (flash) button to
raise the built-in flash.
Change the program using Program shift.
After pressing the shutter button halfway, turn the <6> dial to
change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination
(program). Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture
is taken. Program shift is not possible with flash.
If the “30"” shutter speed and the lower f/number
blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO
speed or use flash.
If the “4000” shutter speed and the higher f/number
blink, it indicates overexposure. Decrease the ISO
speed.
Differences Between <d> and <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto)
In the <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering
mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can
set are limited. With <d> mode, only the shutter speed and aperture are set
automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering mode, and
other functions (p.316).
93
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. Ten imagerecording quality settings are provided: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a,
8a, b, c, 1+73, 1.
1
Pixels recorded (pixel count)
Possible shots
Select [Image quality].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
quality], then press <0>.
X [Image quality] will appear.
the image-recording
2 Select
quality.
The respective quality’s pixel count
and number of possible shots will be
displayed to help you select the
desired quality. Then press <0>.
94
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Guide to Image-recording Quality Settings (Approx.)
Image Quality
73
83
High
quality
74 Medium
84 quality
7a
JPEG
8a
b
Low
quality
c
1+73
1
High
quality
Pixels
Possible
File Size (MB)
Recorded
Shots
(megapixels)
Maximum
Burst
Approx. 17.9
(18M)
6.4
1140
28 (1140)
3.2
2240
2240 (2240)
Approx. 8.0
(8.0M)
3.4
2150
2150 (2150)
1.7
4200
4200 (4200)
Approx. 4.5
(4.5M)
2.2
3350
3350 (3350)
1.1
6360
6360 (6360)
Approx. 2.5
(2.5M)
1.3
5570
5570 (5570)
Approx. 0.35
(0.3M)
0.3
21560
21560 (21560)
Approx. 17.9
(18M)
23.5+6.4
230
4 (4)
23.5
290
7 (8)
* The file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous shooting are
based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100 and Standard
Picture Style) using an 8 GB card. These figures will vary depending on the
subject, card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom
Functions, and other settings.
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible 8 GB card based on
Canon’s testing standards.
95
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
FAQ
I want to select the image-recording quality matching the paper
size for printing.
Refer to the diagram on the left when
Paper size
choosing the image-recording quality. If
A2 (59.4x42cm/23.4x16.5in.)
you want to crop the image, selecting a
73
higher quality (more pixels) such as 73,
83
A3(42x29.7cm/
16.5x11.7in.) 1+73
83, 1+73, or 1 is recommended.
1
74
b is suitable for playing the image on a
84
7a
digital photo frame. c is suitable for
8a
b
emailing the image or using it on a
A4 (29.7x21cm/11.7x8.3in.) website.
12.7x8.9cm/5.0x3.5in.
What’s the difference between 7 and 8?
These settings indicate the different levels of image quality caused
by different compression rates. The 7 setting produces a higher
image quality with the same number of pixels. Although 8 produces
a slightly lower image quality, this allows more images to be saved to
the card. Both b and c have 7 (Fine) quality.
I was able to take more shots than the number of possible shots
indicated.
Depending on the shooting conditions, you may be able to take
more shots than was indicated. It may also be fewer than indicated.
The number of possible shots displayed is only approximate.
Does the camera display the maximum burst?
The maximum burst is displayed in the viewfinder’s right side. Since
it is only a single-digit indicator 0 - 9, any number higher than 8 will
be displayed only as “9”. Note that this number will also be displayed
even when no card is installed in the camera. Be careful not to shoot
without a card in the camera.
When should I use 1?
1 images must be processed on a computer. For details, see
“1” and “1+73” on the next page.
96
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
1
1 is the raw image data before it is made into 73 or other images.
1 images cannot be viewed on a computer without the use of
software, such as Digital Photo Professional (provided, p.366).
However, you can perform various adjustments on them that are
impossible with other image types such as 73. 1 is effective when
you want to precisely adjust the image yourself or shoot an important
subject.
1+73
1+73 records a 1 image and a 73 image with a single shot. The
two images are saved to the card simultaneously. The two images will
be saved in the same folder with the same file numbers (file extension
.JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW). 73 images can also be viewed or
printed from computers on which the software provided with the camera
is not installed.
1 image
0001 . CR2
73 image
0001 . JPG
File number
File extension
We recommend the use of the provided software in order to view RAW
images on a computer. Commercially-available software may not be able to
display RAW images. To see if RAW images taken with this camera are
compatible with other software, consult with the respective software
manufacturer.
97
i: Changing the ISO SpeedN
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set
automatically (p.99).
1
Press the <i> button. (9)
X [ISO speed] will appear.
the ISO speed.
2 SetPress
the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<6> dial to select the desired ISO
speed, then press <0>.
You can also set the ISO speed by
turning the <6> dial while viewing
the ISO speed setting in the
viewfinder.
With [AUTO] selected, the ISO speed
will be set automatically (p.99).
ISO Speed Guide
ISO Speed
Shooting Situation
(No flash)
ISO 100 - 400
Sunny outdoors
Flash Range
The higher the ISO speed,
Overcast skies or evening time the farther the flash range
will extend (p.111).
ISO 1600 - 12800, H
Dark indoors or night
ISO 400 - 1600
* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1:
On], “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) can also be set (p.300).
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority] is
set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 and “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) cannot be
selected (p.301).
Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.
Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.
98
i: Changing the ISO SpeedN
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
With ISO 12800 or “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600), the maximum burst for
continuous shooting will greatly decrease.
As “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) is an expanded ISO speed setting,
noise (such as dots of light and banding) and irregular colors will be more
noticeable, and the resolution will be lower than usual.
As the maximum ISO speed that can be set differs between still photo
shooting and movie shooting (manual exposure), the ISO speed you set
may change when you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting.
Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not
revert to the original setting. The maximum ISO speed that can be set
varies depending on the setting for [2: ISO expansion] under [54:
Custom Functions (C.Fn)].
• When [0: Off] is set: If you set ISO 12800 during still photo shooting
and then switch to movie shooting, ISO speed will be changed to ISO
6400.
• When [1: On] is set: If you set ISO 12800 or “H” (equivalent to ISO
25600) during still photo shooting and then switch to movie shooting,
ISO speed will be changed to “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800).
ISO [AUTO]
If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO], the
actual ISO speed setting will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway. As indicated on the next
page, the ISO speed will be set
automatically to suit the shooting mode.
99
i: Changing the ISO SpeedN
Shooting Mode
ISO Speed Setting
A/7/C/2/4/5
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 6400
3
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 1600
8
C/P/x/6/G
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 6400
F
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 12800
d/s/f/a*1
With flash
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 6400*2
ISO 400*3*4*5
Fixed at ISO 400 for bulb exposures.
Depends on the maximum ISO speed limit set.
If fill flash results in overexposure, ISO 100 or a higher ISO speed will be set.
Except in the A, C, 6, and F modes.
Automatically set within ISO 400 - 1600 (or up to the maximum limit) in the C,
2, 3, 4, 5, P and <d> modes if you use bounce flash with an external
Speedlite.
When [AUTO] is set, the ISO speed is indicated in whole-stop increments.
However, the ISO speed is actually set in finer increments. Therefore, in the
image’s shooting information (p.270), you may find an ISO speed such as
125 or 640 displayed as the ISO speed.
3 Setting the Maximum ISO Speed for [ISO Auto]M
For ISO Auto, you can set the maximum ISO speed limit within ISO 400
- 6400.
Under the [z2] tab, select [ISO Auto],
then press <0>. Select the ISO
speed, then press <0>.
100
A Optimal Image Characteristics for the SubjectN
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
In Basic Zone modes, you cannot select the Picture Style.
1
Select [Picture Style].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
X The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
2 Select
Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
Picture Style, then press <0>.
The Picture Style will be set and the
menu will reappear.
Picture Style Characteristics
D Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The
colors will look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery, and
sunsets in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture
Style.
P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.138), you can adjust the skin
tone.
101
A Optimal Image Characteristics for the SubjectN
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
S Neutral
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. For natural colors and subdued images.
U Faithful
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. When the subject is captured under a color
temperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to
match the subject’s color. Images will appear dull and subdued.
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Black-and-white images shot in formats other than 1 cannot be reverted
to color. If you want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the
[Monochrome] setting has been canceled. When [Monochrome] is
selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.
W User Def. 1-3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.140). Any User
Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same
default settings as the [Auto] Picture Style.
102
f: Changing the Autofocus OperationN
You can select the AF (autofocus) operation characteristics suiting the
shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF
operation is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.
1
Set the lens focus mode switch to
<AF>.
[AF operation].
2 Select
Under the [z3] tab, select [AF
operation], then press <0>.
X [AF operation] will appear.
the AF operation.
3 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the desired AF operation, then press
<0>.
the subject.
4 Focus
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway. The
camera will then autofocus in the
selected AF operation.
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus only once.
When focus is achieved, the dot inside the AF point achieving focus
lights up briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <o> in the
viewfinder will also light up.
With evaluative metering (p.121), the exposure setting will be set at
the same time focus is achieved.
While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.
103
f: Changing the Autofocus OperationN
If focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <o> in the
viewfinder will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the
shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot and try to
focus again, or see “Subjects Difficult to Focus” (p.107).
If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus
is achieved.
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing
distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the subject will be focused continuously.
The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
When the AF point selection (p.105) is automatic, the camera first
uses the center AF point to focus. During autofocusing, if the subject
moves away from the center AF point, focus tracking continues as
long as the subject is covered by another AF point.
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.
AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically
AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI
Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.
After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts
moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF
operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and keep tracking the
moving subject.
When focus is achieved in the AI Focus AF operation with the Servo mode
active, the beeper will sound softly. However, the focus confirmation light
<o> in the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be locked in
this case.
104
S Selecting the AF PointN
In Basic Zone modes, the camera will normally focus the closest subject
automatically.
Therefore, it may not always focus your target subject. In the <d>,
<s>, <f>, and <a> modes, you can select the AF point and use it
to focus the target subject.
1
Press the <S> button. (9)
X The selected AF point will be
displayed on the LCD monitor and in
the viewfinder.
the AF point.
2 Select
Use the <S> cross keys to select
the AF point.
While looking through the viewfinder,
you can select the AF point by turning
the <6> dial until the desired AF
point lights up in red.
When all the AF points light up,
automatic AF point selection will be
set. The AF point will be selected
automatically to focus the subject.
Pressing <0> toggles the AF point
selection between the center AF point
and automatic AF point selection.
the subject.
3 Focus
Aim the selected AF point over the
subject and press the shutter button
halfway to focus.
You can also tap the LCD monitor screen to select the AF point. During
manual AF point selection, tapping the [
] icon at the bottom left of
the screen will switch to automatic AF point selection.
If you set [53: Switch S / A button] to [Enable], you can switch the
functions of the <S> button and <A> button.
105
S Selecting the AF PointN
Shooting Tips
When shooting a portrait up close, use One-Shot AF and focus
the eyes.
If you focus the eyes first, you can then recompose and the face will
remain sharp.
If it is difficult to focus, select and use the center AF point.
The center AF point is the most sensitive among the nine AF points.
To make it easier to focus a moving subject, set the camera to
automatic AF point selection and AI Servo AF (p.104).
The center AF point will first be used to focus the subject. During
autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF point,
focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by
another AF point.
AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash
Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway,
the built-in flash may fire a brief burst of flashes. This illuminates the
subject to enable easier autofocusing.
The AF-assist beam will not be fired from the built-in flash in the following
shooting modes: <7>, <3>, <5>, and <C>.
The AF-assist beam cannot be emitted with AI Servo AF operation.
The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is
approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.
In Creative Zone modes, when you raise the built-in flash with the <I>
button (p.111), the AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary. Note
that depending on the setting for [4: AF-assist beam firing] under [54:
Custom Functions (C.Fn)], AF beam will not be emitted (p.302).
If you use an Extender (sold separately) and the f/number becomes higher
than f/5.6, AF shooting will not be possible (except in [u+Tracking],
[FlexiZone - Multi], and [FlexiZone - Single] during Live View shooting).
For details, refer to the Extender’s instruction manual.
106
Subjects Difficult to Focus
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus confirmation light
<o> blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
Very low-contrast subjects
(Example: Blue sky, solid-color walls, etc.)
Subjects in very low light
Extremely backlit and reflective subjects
(Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.)
Near and far subjects covered by an AF point
(Example: Animal in a cage, etc.)
Repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
In such cases, do either of the following:
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as the
subject and lock the focus before recomposing the shot (p.61).
(2) Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.
For subjects difficult to focus during Live View shooting with [u+Tracking],
[FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone - Single], see page 170.
MF: Manual Focus
the lens focus mode switch to
1 Set
<MF>.
the subject.
2 Focus
Focus by turning the lens focusing
Focusing ring
ring until the subject looks sharp in
the viewfinder.
If you press the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF point
achieving focus will light up briefly in red, the beeper will sound, and the
focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will light up.
107
i Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. In Basic Zone modes,
you cannot select Silent single shooting and Silent continuous shooting.
1
Select [Drive/self-tmr].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Drive/
self-tmr], then press <0>.
X [Drive/self-timer mode] will appear.
the drive mode.
2 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the desired drive mode, then press
<0>.
u : Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will
be taken.
i : Continuous shooting (Max. approx. 4 shots/sec.)
While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be
taken continuously.
B : Silent single shootingM
Single shooting with less shooting sound than <u>.
M : Silent continuous shooting (Max. approx. 2.5 shots/sec.)M
Continuous shooting with less shooting sound than <i>.
Q : Self-timer: 10sec./remote control
l : Self-timer: 2 sec.
q : Self-timer: Continuous
For self-timer shooting, see page 110. For remote control
shooting, see page 309.
108
i Selecting the Drive Mode
If <B> or <M> is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter
button completely until the picture is shot will be longer than with normal
single or continuous shooting.
If [z3: AF operation] is set to [AI Servo AF] or [AI Focus AF], <B>
and <M> cannot be selected. If <B> or <M> is set, [z3: AF
operation] will be fixed to [One Shot AF].
With Live View shooting, <B> and <M> cannot be set.
When the battery level is low, the continuous shooting speed may
become slightly slower.
In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become
slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.
i: The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 4 shots/sec. is
attained under the following conditions*: At 1/500 sec. or faster shutter
speed, and at the maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens). The
continuous shooting speed may decrease due to shutter speed,
aperture, subject conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, etc.
* With the following lenses, 4 shots per second is achieved with One-Shot AF and
the Image Stabilizer turned off: EF 300mm f/4L IS USM, EF 28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
USM, EF 75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, and EF 100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.
109
j Using the Self-timer
1
Select [Drive/self-tmr].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Drive/
self-tmr], then press <0>.
X [Drive/self-timer mode] will appear.
the self-timer.
2 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the self-timer, then press <0>.
Q: 10-sec. self-timer
The remote controller can also be used (p.309).
l: 2-sec. self-timer (p.147)
q: 10-sec. self-timer plus continuous shots
Press the <W> <X> keys to set
the number of multiple shots (2 to
10) to be taken with the self-timer.
picture.
3 TakeLookthethrough
the viewfinder, focus the subject,
then press the shutter button completely.
X You can check the self-timer operation with
the self-timer lamp, beeper, and countdown
display (in seconds) on the LCD monitor.
X Two seconds before the picture is
taken, the self-timer lamp will light up
and the beeper will sound faster.
With <q>, the interval between the multiple shots may be prolonged depending
on the shooting functions settings such as the image-recording quality or flash.
If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter
button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.310). If stray light enters the
viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.89) to check
focus and exposure is recommended.
When using the self-timer to shoot only yourself, use focus lock (p.61) on
an object at about the same distance as where you will stand.
To cancel the self-timer, either touch the LCD monitor or press <0>.
110
D Using the Built-in Flash
In indoors, low light, or backlit conditions in daylight, just raise the builtin flash and press the shutter button to take flash pictures. In the <d>
mode, the shutter speed (1/60 sec. - 1/200 sec.) will be set
automatically to prevent camera shake.
1
Press the <D> button.
In Creative Zone modes, you can
press the <D> button anytime to take
flash pictures.
While the flash is recycling, “DbuSY”
is displayed in the viewfinder, and
[BUSYD] is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
the shutter button halfway.
2 Press
In the bottom left of the viewfinder,
check that the <D> icon is lit.
the picture.
3 TakeWhen
focus is achieved and you
press the shutter button completely,
the flash will fire for the picture.
Effective Flash Range
ISO speed
(p.98)
100
200
400
800
1600
3200
6400
12800
H: 25600
[Approx. in meters/feet]
EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II
Wide Angle
Telephoto
1 - 2.7 / 3.3 - 8.9
1 - 1.7 / 3.3 - 5.6
1 - 3.8 / 3.3 - 12.5
1 - 2.4 / 3.3 - 7.9
1 - 5.4 / 3.3 - 17.7
1 - 3.4 / 3.3 - 11.2
1 - 7.6 / 3.3 - 24.9
1 - 4.7 / 3.3 - 15.4
1.3 - 10.7 / 4.3 - 35.1
1 - 6.7 / 3.3 - 22.0
1.9 - 15.2 / 6.2 - 49.9
1.2 - 9.5 / 3.9 - 31.2
2.7 - 21.5 / 8.9 - 70.5
1.7 - 13.4 / 5.6 - 44.0
3.8 - 30.4 / 12.5 - 99.7
2.4 - 19.0 / 7.9 - 62.3
5.4 - 43.0 / 17.7 - 141.1 3.4 - 26.9 / 11.2 - 88.3
111
D Using the Built-in Flash
Shooting Tips
If the subject is far away, increase the ISO speed (p.98).
By increasing the ISO speed, you can extend the flash range.
In bright light, decrease the ISO speed.
If the exposure setting in the viewfinder blinks, decrease the ISO
speed.
Detach the lens hood. Do not get too close to the subject.
If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject,
the bottom of the picture may look dark due to the obstructed flash.
For important shots, check the image on the LCD monitor to make
sure the flash exposure looks natural (not dark at the bottom).
3 Red-eye Reduction
Using the red-eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can
reduce red eye.
Red-eye reduction will function in any shooting mode except <7>,
<3>, <5>, <x>, or <G>.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Red-eye
reduc.], then press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
For flash photography, when you press
the shutter button halfway, the red-eye
reduction lamp will light up. Then when
you press the shutter button
completely, the picture will be taken.
The red-eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at
the red-eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you are
close to the subject.
When you press the shutter button halfway, the
scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will
shrink and turn off. For best results, take the picture
after this scale display turns off.
The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the subject.
112
4
Advanced Shooting
This chapter builds on Chapter 3 and introduces more
ways to shoot creatively.
The first half of this chapter explains how to use the <s>,
<f>, and <a> modes on the Mode Dial.
All the functions explained in Chapter 3 can also be used in
the <s>, <f>, and <a> modes.
To see which functions can be used in each shooting mode,
see page 316.
The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes
(p.26).
c Main Dial Pointer
The pointer icon <c> displayed
together with the shutter speed, aperture
setting, or exposure compensation
amount indicates that you can turn the
<6> dial to adjust the respective
setting.
113
s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement
You can either freeze the action or create motion blur with the <s>
(Shutter-priority AE) mode on the Mode Dial.
* <s> stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)
1
Frozen action
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
the desired shutter speed.
2 SetSee
“Shooting Tips” for advice on
setting the shutter speed.
Turning the <6> dial to the right
sets a faster shutter speed, and
turning it to the left sets a slower one.
the picture.
3 TakeWhen
you focus and press the
shutter button completely, the picture
will be taken at the selected shutter
speed.
Shutter Speed Display
The LCD monitor displays the shutter speed as a fraction. However, the
viewfinder displays only the denominator. “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"”
is 15 sec.
114
s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement
Shooting Tips
To freeze the motion of a fast-moving subject
Use a fast shutter speed such as 1/4000 sec. to 1/500 sec.
To blur a running child or animal and convey an impression of
motion
Use a medium shutter speed such as 1/250 sec. to 1/30 sec. Follow
the moving subject through the viewfinder and press the shutter
button to take the picture. If you use a telephoto lens, hold it steady
to prevent camera shake.
To blur a flowing river or fountain
Use a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod to
prevent hand-held camera shake.
Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not blink.
If you press the shutter button halfway and change
the shutter speed while the aperture is displayed,
the aperture display will also change to maintain the
same exposure (amount of light reaching the image
sensor). If you exceed the adjustable aperture
range, the aperture display will blink to indicate that
the standard exposure cannot be obtained.
If the exposure will be too dark, the maximum aperture (smallest
number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to
set a slower shutter speed or increase the ISO speed.
If the exposure will be too bright, the minimum aperture (highest
number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the right to
set a faster shutter speed or decrease the ISO speed.
D Using the Built-in Flash
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set
automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the automatically-set
aperture. The shutter speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec.
115
f: Changing the Depth of Field
To blur the background or to make everything near and far look sharp,
set the Mode Dial to <f> (Aperture-priority AE) to adjust the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
* <f> stands for Aperture value, which is the size of the diaphragm hole inside
the lens.
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
1
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
desired aperture.
2 SetThethehigher
the f/number, the wider the depth
of field where sharper focus is obtained in
both the foreground and background.
Turning the <6> dial to the right will set
a higher f/number (smaller aperture
opening), and turning it to the left will set a
lower f/number (larger aperture opening).
the picture.
3 TakeFocus
and press the shutter button
completely. The picture will be taken
with the selected aperture.
Aperture Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.
116
f: Changing the Depth of Field
Shooting Tips
When using an aperture with a high f/number or shooting in low
light scenes, note that camera shake can occur.
A higher aperture f/number will make the shutter speed slower.
Under low light, the shutter speed can be as long as 30 sec. In such
cases, increase the ISO speed and hold the camera steady or use a
tripod.
The depth of field depends not only on the aperture, but also on
the lens and on the subject distance.
Since wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range of
acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus), you need
not set a high aperture f/number to obtain a sharp picture from the
foreground to the background. On the other hand, a telephoto lens
has a narrow depth of field.
And the closer the subject, the narrower the depth of field. A farther
subject will have a wider depth of field.
Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does not blink.
If you press the shutter button halfway and change
the aperture while the shutter speed is displayed,
the shutter speed display will also change to
maintain the same exposure (amount of light
reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the
adjustable shutter speed range, the shutter speed
display will blink to indicate that the standard
exposure cannot be obtained.
If the picture will be too dark, the “30"” (30 sec.) shutter speed
display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to set
a lower aperture f/number or increase the ISO speed.
If the picture will be too bright, the “4000” (1/4000 sec.) shutter
speed display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the
right to set a higher aperture f/number or decrease the ISO speed.
117
f: Changing the Depth of Field
D Using the Built-in Flash
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set
automatically to match the set aperture (autoflash exposure). The
shutter speed will be set automatically between 1/200 sec. - 30 sec. to
suit the scene’s brightness.
In low light, the main subject is exposed with the auto flash metering,
and the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set
automatically. Both the subject and background look properly exposed
(automatic slow-speed flash sync). If you are handholding the camera,
keep it steady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is
recommended.
To prevent a slow shutter speed, under [z2: Flash control], set
[Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/200-1/60 sec. auto] or [1/200
sec. (fixed)] (p.232).
Depth-of-Field PreviewN
The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
Press the depth-of-field preview button
to stop down the lens to the current
aperture setting and check the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
While looking at the Live View image (p.150) and holding down the depth-offield preview button, you can change the aperture and see how the depth of
field changes.
118
a: Manual Exposure
You can set both the shutter speed and aperture manually as desired.
While referring to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder, you can
set the exposure as desired. This method is called manual exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
2 Set the ISO speed (p.98).
the shutter speed and
3 Set
aperture.
<6>
<O> + <6>
Standard exposure index
Exposure level mark
To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial.
To set the aperture, hold down the
<O> button and turn the <6> dial.
the subject.
4 Focus
Press the shutter button halfway.
X The exposure setting will be
displayed in the viewfinder.
The exposure level mark <h>
indicates how far the current
exposure level is from the standard
exposure level.
the exposure and take the picture.
5 SetCheck
the exposure level indicator and set the desired shutter
speed and aperture.
If the exposure level exceeds ±2 stops from the standard
exposure, the end of the exposure level indicator will display <I>
or <J> in the viewfinder. (On the LCD monitor, if the exposure
level exceeds ±3 stops, <I> or <J> will be displayed.)
If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter speed
and aperture in order to obtain a standard exposure. Therefore, you may not
obtain the desired exposure effect.
119
a: Manual Exposure
In [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark <X> for [Disable
during man expo] is removed, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set in
the <a> mode (p.130).
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO speed.
If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.24, 25)
compared to when the <A> button was pressed.
I Using the Built-in Flash
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set
automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture.
The shutter speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec or bulb.
BULB: Bulb Exposures
A bulb exposure keeps the shutter open for
as long as you hold down the shutter button.
It can be used to shoot fireworks and other
subjects requiring long exposures.
In step 3 on the preceding page, turn the
<6> dial to the left to set <BULB>.
The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the LCD monitor.
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may
damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.
Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image may
look a little grainy.
When [z3: Long exp. noise reduction] is set to [Auto] or [Enable],
noise generated by the long exposure can be reduced (p.132).
For bulb exposures, using a tripod and a remote switch (sold separately,
p.310) is recommended.
You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.309) for bulb
shooting. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button, the
bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button
again to stop the bulb exposure.
120
q Changing the Metering ModeN
Four methods (metering modes) to measure the subject’s brightness
are provided. Normally, evaluative metering is recommended.
In Basic Zone modes, automatic selection is set automatically.
1
Select [Metering mode].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Metering
mode], then press <0>.
the metering mode.
2 SetSelect
the desired metering mode,
then press <0>.
q Evaluative metering
This is a general-purpose metering mode
suited even for backlit subjects. The camera
sets the exposure automatically to suit the
scene.
w Partial metering
Effective when the background is much brighter
than the subject due to backlighting, etc. The
gray area in the left figure is where the
brightness is metered to obtain the standard
exposure.
r Spot metering
This is for metering a specific part of the subject
or scene. The gray area in the left figure is
where the brightness is metered to obtain the
standard exposure. This metering mode is for
advanced users.
121
q Changing the Metering ModeN
e Center-weighted average metering
The brightness is metered at the image center
and then averaged for the entire scene. This
metering mode is for advanced users.
With q (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked when you
press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved. In the w (Partial
metering), r (Spot metering), and e (Center-weighted average metering)
modes, the exposure is set when the photo is taken. (Pressing the shutter
button halfway does not lock the exposure.) During Live View shooting, the
exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken, regardless of the
metering mode.
122
Setting Exposure CompensationN
O Setting Exposure Compensation
Set exposure compensation if the exposure (without flash) does not come out
as desired. This feature can be used in Creative Zone modes (except <a>).
You can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
Increased exposure for a brighter image
Decreased exposure for a darker image
Dark exposure
Making it brighter:
Hold down the <O> button and
turn the <6> dial to the right
(increased exposure).
Making it darker:
Hold down the <O> button and
turn the <6> dial to the left
(decreased exposure).
X As shown in the figure, the exposure
level is displayed on the LCD monitor
and in the viewfinder.
After taking the picture, cancel the
exposure compensation by setting
it back to 0.
Increased exposure for a brighter image
The exposure compensation amount displayed in the viewfinder goes up
to only ±2 stops. If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±2
stops, the end of the exposure level indicator will display <I> or <J>.
If you want to set exposure compensation exceeding ±2 stops, setting it
with [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] (p.125) or with the Quick Control screen
(p.44) is recommended.
123
Setting Exposure CompensationN
y Flash Exposure Compensation
Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject
does not come out as desired. You can set the exposure compensation
up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
1
Press the <Q> button. (7)
X The Quick Control screen will appear
(p.44).
[y].
2 Select
Press the <S> cross keys to select [y*].
X [Flash exposure comp.] will be
displayed at the bottom.
exposure compensation amount.
3 SetTothemake
the flash exposure brighter,
turn the <6> dial to the right
(increased exposure).
To make it darker, turn the <6> dial
to the left (decreased exposure).
X When you press the shutter button
halfway, the <y> icon will appear in
the viewfinder.
After taking the picture, cancel the
flash exposure compensation by
setting it back to 0.
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.130) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation is set.
You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash settings]
in [z2: Flash control] (p.233).
124
3 Auto Exposure BracketingN
This feature takes exposure compensation a step further by varying the
exposure automatically (up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments) with
three shots as shown below.
You can then choose the best exposure. This is called AEB (Auto
Exposure Bracketing).
Standard exposure
Darker exposure
(Decreased exposure)
1
Brighter exposure
(Increased exposure)
Select [Expo.comp./AEB].
Under the [z2] tab, select
[Expo.comp./AEB], then press <0>.
the AEB range.
2 SetTurn
the <6> dial to set the AEB range.
AEB range
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the
exposure compensation amount. If
AEB is combined with exposure
compensation, AEB will be applied
centering on the exposure
compensation amount.
Press <0> to set it.
When you press the <M> button
to exit the menu, the AEB range will
be displayed on the LCD monitor.
the picture.
3 TakeFocus
and press the shutter button
completely. The three bracketed
shots will be taken in this sequence:
standard exposure, decreased
exposure, and increased exposure.
125
3 Auto Exposure BracketingN
Canceling AEB
Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB range display.
The AEB setting will also be canceled automatically if the power
switch is set to <2>, flash recycling is completed, etc.
Shooting Tips
Using AEB with continuous shooting
If Drive/self-timer is set to <i> or <M> (p.108) and you press the
shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken
continuously in this sequence: standard exposure, decreased
exposure, and increased exposure. The shooting will then stop
automatically.
Using AEB with single shooting (u/B).
Press the shutter button three times to take the three bracketed
shots. The three bracketed shots will be exposed in the following
sequence: standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
Using AEB with the self-timer or a remote controller (sold
separately)
With the self-timer or a remote control shooting (<Q> or <l>),
you can take three continuous shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
With <q> (p.110) set, the number of continuous shots will be three
times the number set.
AEB cannot be used with flash, [Multi Shot Noise Reduction], Creative
filters, or bulb exposures.
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.130) is set to any setting other
than [Disable], the effect of AEB may be minimal.
126
A Locking the ExposureN
You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from the
exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then recompose
and take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for backlit subjects.
1
Focus the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
X The exposure setting will be
displayed.
the <A> button. (0)
2 Press
X The <A> icon lights up in the
viewfinder to indicate that the
exposure setting is locked (AE lock).
Each time you press the <A> button, the
current autoexposure setting is locked.
and take the picture.
3 Recompose
If you want to maintain the AE lock
while taking more shots, hold down
the <A> button and press the shutter
button to take another shot.
AE Lock Effects
Metering Mode
(p.121)
q*
wre
AF Point Selection Method (p.105)
Automatic Selection
Manual Selection
AE lock is applied at the AF
AE lock is applied at the
point that achieved focus.
selected AF point.
AE lock is applied at the center AF point.
* When the lens’ focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied at the
center AF point.
If you set [53: Switch S / A button] to [Enable], you can switch the
functions of the <S> button and <A> button.
127
A Locking the Flash ExposureN
If the subject is on the side of the frame and you use flash, the subject
may turn out to be too bright or dark depending on the background, etc.
This is when you should use FE lock. After setting the proper flash
exposure for the subject, you can recompose (put the subject toward
the side) and shoot. This feature can also be used with a Canon EXseries Speedlite.
* FE stands for Flash Exposure.
1
Spot metering circle
Press the <D> button.
X The built-in flash will rise.
Press the shutter button halfway and
look in the viewfinder to check that
the <D> icon is lit.
2 Focus the subject.
the <A> button. (8)
3 Press
Aim the spot metering circle over the
subject, then press the <A> button.
X The flash will fire a preflash and the
required flash output is calculated
and retained in memory.
X In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed
for a moment and <d> will light up.
Each time you press the <A> button,
a preflash is fired and the required
flash output is calculated and retained
in memory.
the picture.
4 TakeCompose
the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
X The flash is fired when the picture is
taken.
128
A Locking the Flash ExposureN
If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash,
the <D> icon will blink. Move closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to
4.
FE lock is not possible during Live View shooting.
If you set [53: Switch S / A button] to [Enable], you can switch the
functions of the <S> button and <A> button.
129
3 Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG
images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.
In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.
1
Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
picture.
3 TakeThetheimage
will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected if
necessary.
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority] is
set to [1: Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to
[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed.
If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,
the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set
this function to [Disable].
Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
In step 2, if you press the <B> button and uncheck <X> the [Disable
during man expo] setting, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can also be set in
the <a> mode.
130
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise
reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high
ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the
image (shadow areas) is further reduced. Change the setting to suit the
noise level.
1
Select [High ISO speed NR].
Under the [z3] tab, select [High ISO
speed NR], then press <0>.
the level.
2 SetSelect
the desired noise reduction
level, then press <0>.
X The setting screen closes and the
menu will reappear.
[M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction]
This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned
and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
picture.
3 TakeThetheimage
will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
With [High] or [Multi Shot Noise Reduction], the maximum burst for
continuous shooting will greatly decrease.
If you play back or directly print a 1+73 or 1 image with the camera,
the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal. Check
the noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced images with Digital Photo
Professional (provided software, p.365).
131
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
When [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is Set
If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the
noise reduction effect may be minimal.
If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal
shooting. During the processing of the images, “BUSY” will be displayed
and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.
1+73 or 1 cannot be selected. AEB shooting and WB bracketing
cannot be used. [z3: Long exp. noise reduction] cannot be set. If any
of these has already been selected or set, [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] cannot be set.
Flash shooting is not possible. The AF-assist beam will be emitted according to
the [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)]’s [4: AF-assist beam firing] setting.
You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures.
If you turn off the power, change the shooting mode to a Basic Zone
mode, shoot a bulb exposure, or shoot a movie, the setting will
automatically be changed to [Standard].
[z3: Dust Delete Data] cannot be set.
Direct printing (p.282) is not possible.
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.
1
Select [Long exp. noise
reduction].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Long
exp. noise reduction], then press
<0>.
132
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
the desired setting.
2 SetSelect
the desired setting, then press
<0>.
X The setting screen closes and the
menu will reappear.
[Auto]
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.
[Enable]
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting can reduce noise that cannot be detected with
the [Auto] setting.
picture.
3 TakeThetheimage
will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
With [Auto] and [Enable], the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. You
cannot take another picture until the noise reduction process is
completed.
Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]
setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.
With [Auto] and [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View
image displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction
process. The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is
completed. (You cannot take another picture.)
133
3 Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject
outlines is called chromatic aberration. Both lens aberrations can be
corrected. RAW images can be corrected with Digital Photo
Professional (provided software, p.365).
Peripheral Illumination Correction
1
Select [Lens aberration
correction].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens
aberration correction], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
Select [Peripheral illumin.], then
press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
If [Correction data not available] is
displayed, see “Lens Correction Data”
on page 136.
picture.
3 TakeThetheimage
will be recorded with the
peripheral illumination corrected.
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image
periphery.
The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum
correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (provided
software, p.365).
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
134
3 Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
Chromatic Aberration Correction
1
Select the setting.
Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
Select [Chromatic aberration], then
press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
If [Correction data not available] is
displayed, see “Lens Correction Data”
on the next page.
picture.
2 TakeThetheimage
will be recorded with the
chromatic aberration corrected.
With [Enable], the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly
decrease.
If you play back a RAW image shot with the chromatic aberration
corrected, the image will be displayed on the camera without the
chromatic aberration correction applied. Check the chromatic aberration
correction with Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.365).
135
3 Lens Peripheral Illumination / Chromatic Aberration Correction
Lens Correction Data
The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction
data and chromatic aberration correction data for approx. 25 lenses. If
you select [Enable], the peripheral illumination correction and
chromatic aberration correction will be applied automatically for any
lens whose correction data is registered in the camera.
With EOS Utility (provided software), you can check which lenses have
their correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the
correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual (p.361).
Notes for Peripheral Illumination Correction and Chromatic Aberration
Correction
Peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction
cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.
When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
If you use the magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral
illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will not be
reflected in the image shown on the screen.
If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image after
shooting and check it again.
Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size
Converter is attached.
If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to
[Disable].
If the lens does not have distance information, the correction amount will
be lower.
136
A Customizing Image CharacteristicsN
You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters
such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take
test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 139.
1
Select [Picture Style].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
X The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
2 Select
X Select a Picture Style, then press the
<B> button.
a parameter.
3 Select
Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.
the parameter.
4 SetPress
the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust
the parameter as desired, then press
<0>.
Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted parameters. The Picture
Style selection screen will reappear.
X Any parameter settings different from
the default will be displayed in blue.
By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the respective
Picture Style to its default parameter settings.
To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, follow step 2 on page 101 to
select the adjusted Picture Style and then shoot.
137
A Customizing Image CharacteristicsN
Parameter Settings and Effects
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of the image.
To make it less sharp, set it toward the E end. The closer it is to E,
the softer the image will look.
To make it sharper, set it toward the F end. The closer it is to F, the
sharper the image will look.
Contrast
Adjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors.
To decrease the contrast, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is
to G, the more muted the image will look.
To increase the contrast, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to
H, the crisper the image will look.
Saturation
Adjusts the color saturation in the image.
To decrease the color saturation, set it toward the minus end. The
closer it is to G, the more diluted the colors will look.
To increase the color saturation, set it toward the plus end. The
closer it is to H, the bolder the colors will look.
Color tone
Adjusts the color tone of skin.
To make the skin color redder, set it toward the minus end. The
closer it is to G, the redder the skin tone will look.
To reduce skin redness, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to
H, the more yellow the skin tone will look.
138
A Customizing Image CharacteristicsN
V Monochrome Adjustment
For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in
addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding
page.
kFilter Effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
Filter
Sample Effects
N: None
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye: Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: Orange
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: Red
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G: Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
lToning Effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in that
color. It can make the image look more
impressive.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or
[G:Green].
139
A Registering Preferred Image CharacteristicsN
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].
You can create multiple Picture Styles with different settings for
parameters such as sharpness and contrast.
You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that has been
registered to the camera with EOS Utility (provided software, p.365).
1
Select [Picture Style].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
X The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
[User Def. *].
2 Select
Select [User Def. *], then press
<B>.
X The Detail setting screen will appear.
<0>.
3 Press
With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.
the base Picture Style.
4 Select
Press the <S> cross keys or turn the
<6> dial to select the base Picture
Style, then press <0>.
To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style that has been registered to the
camera with EOS Utility (provided
software), select the Picture Style here.
140
A Registering Preferred Image CharacteristicsN
a parameter.
5 Select
Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.
the parameter.
6 SetPress
the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust
the parameter as desired, then press
<0>.
For details, see “Customizing Image
Characteristics” on pages 137-139.
Press the <M> button to register the
modified Picture Style. The Picture Style
selection screen will then reappear.
X The base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
X If the settings in a Picture Style
registered under [User Def. *] have
been modified from the base Picture
Style settings, the Picture Style’s
name will be displayed in blue.
If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *],
changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter
settings of the registered Picture Style.
If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.227), all the [User Def. *]
settings will revert to their defaults. Picture Styles registered via EOS
Utility (provided software) will have only their modified parameters
reverted to their default settings.
To shoot with a registered Picture Style, follow step 2 on page 101 to
select [User Def. *], then shoot.
Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,
refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual PDF (p.361).
141
3 Matching the Light SourceN
The function adjusting the color tone so that white objects look white in
the picture is called white balance (WB). Normally, the <Q> (Auto)
setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors
cannot be obtained with <Q>, you can select the white balance that
matches the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.
1
Select [White balance].
Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
a white balance setting.
2 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
desired setting, then press <0>.
The “Approx. ****K” (K: Kelvin)
displayed for the white balance
settings <W>, <E>, <R>, <Y>
or <U> is the respective color
temperature.
O Custom White Balance
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance
for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure
under the actual light source to be used.
1
Spot metering circle
142
Shoot a white object.
The plain, white object should fill the
spot metering circle.
Focus manually and set the standard
exposure for the white object.
You can use any white balance
setting.
3 Matching the Light SourceN
[Custom White Balance].
2 Select
Under the [z2] tab, select [Custom
White Balance], then press <0>.
X The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
the white balance data.
3 Import
Select the image that was captured in
step 1, then press <0>.
X On the dialog screen that appears,
select [OK] and the data will be
imported.
When the menu reappears, press the
<M> button to exit the menu.
[O (Custom)].
4 Select
Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
Select [O (Custom)], then press
<0>.
If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: images captured
while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome] (p.101), images
processed with a Creative filter, and cropped images.
Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reflector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white balance.
The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility (provided
software, p.365) will be registered under <O>. If you perform step 3,
the data for the registered personal white balance will be erased.
143
u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceN
You can correct the white balance that has been set. This adjustment
will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color
temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color
can be corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color
temperature conversion or color compensating filters.
White Balance Correction
1
Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].
Under the [z2] tab, select [WB
Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.
X The WB correction/WB bracketing
screen will appear.
the white balance correction.
2 SetPress
the <S> cross keys to move
Sample setting: A2, G1
the “ ” mark to the desired position.
B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The
image’s color balance will be
corrected towards the selected color.
On the upper right, “Shift” indicates
the direction and correction amount.
Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
When the white balance is corrected, <u> will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating
the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)
144
u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceN
White Balance Auto Bracketing
With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be recorded
simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white balance
setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or magenta/
green bias. This is called white balance bracketing (WB-BKT). White
balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments.
Set the white balance bracketing
amount.
B/A bias ±3 levels
In step 2 for “White Balance
Correction”, when you turn the <6>
dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will
change to “
” (3 points).
Turning the dial to the right sets the B/
A bracketing, and turning it to the left
sets the M/G bracketing.
X On the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction amount.
Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
be lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to approx.
one-third the normal number.
You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record
the shot to the card.
“BKT” stands for bracketing.
145
3 Setting the Color Reproduction RangeN
The range of reproducible colors is called the color space. With this
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically.
1
Select [Color space].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.
the desired color space.
2 SetSelect
[sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar
with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a
sRGB computer environment and with printers not compatible with
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Postprocessing of the image with computer software will therefore be
required.
If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the
first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
The ICC profile is not appended. Refer to explanations about the ICC
profile in the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (p.361).
146
Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera ShakeN
The camera’s mechanical shake caused by the reflex mirror action can
blur images taken with a super telephoto lens or close-up (macro) lens.
In such cases, mirror lockup is effective.
Mirror lockup is enabled by setting [5: Mirror lockup] to [1: Enable]
in [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)] (p.302).
1
Focus the subject, then press the shutter button
completely.
XThe mirror will swing up.
2 Press the shutter button completely again.
XThe picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.
After taking the picture, set [5: Mirror lockup] to [0: Disable].
Shooting Tips
Using the self-timer <Q>, <l> with mirror lockup
When you press the shutter button completely, the mirror locks up.
The picture is then taken 10 sec. or 2 sec. later.
Remote control shooting
Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken, remote
control shooting together with mirror lockup can further prevent
camera shake (p.309). With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold
separately) set to a 2-sec. delay, press the transmit button and the
mirror will lock up before the picture is taken 2 sec. later.
147
Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera ShakeN
In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,
take the picture promptly after mirror lockup.
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may
damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.
If you use the self-timer and bulb exposure in combination with a mirror
lockup, keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer delay
time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the
self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no
picture will be taken.
Even if you set Drive/self-timer to <i>, <M>, or <q>, the camera
will still shoot in single shooting mode.
When [z3: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction], four continuous shots will be taken for the single picture
regardless of the [5: Mirror lockup] setting.
If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the
mirror again.
148
5
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the picture on the camera’s
LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.
If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended.
Remote Live View Shooting
With EOS Utility (provided software, p.365) installed in your
computer, you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot
remotely while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to
the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.361).
149
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
1
Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
X The Live View image will appear on the LCD
monitor. In the <A> mode, the scene icon
for the scene detected by the camera is
displayed on the upper left (p.153).
By default, Continuous AF (p.161) will
take effect.
The Live View image will closely
reflect the brightness level of the
actual image you capture.
the subject.
2 Focus
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method (p.164).
the picture.
3 TakePress
the shutter button completely.
X The picture will be taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.
X After the image review ends, the camera will
return to Live View shooting automatically.
Press the <A> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
The image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with the image-recording
quality set to JPEG 73).
In Creative Zone modes, you can check the depth of field by pressing the
depth-of-field preview button.
During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also
be applied to subsequent shots.
You can also tap the subject on the LCD monitor to focus (p.164-173)
and shoot (p.174).
You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.309) for Live View shooting.
150
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Enabling Live View Shooting
Set [A: Live View shoot.] to [Enable].
Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting
Temperature
Shooting Conditions
No Flash
50% Flash Use
Room temperature (23°C / 73°F)
Approx. 160 shots
Approx. 150 shots
Low temperatures (0°C / 32°F)
Approx. 150 shots
Approx. 140 shots
The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E12 and CIPA
(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E12, continuous Live View shooting is
possible for approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at room temperature (23°C / 73°F).
In the <x> mode, Live View shooting is not possible.
In the <F> and <G> shooting modes, the shooting area will be smaller
than with other shooting modes.
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may
damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.
Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 178-179.
When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot will
be taken. Also, the time it takes to take the picture after you press the shutter
button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder shooting.
If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
off automatically after the time set in [52: Auto power off] (p.217). If
[52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end
automatically after 30 min. (camera power remains on).
With the stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) or HDMI cable
HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the Live View image on a TV
(p.262, 265).
151
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Information Display
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change.
AF point (Quick mode)
Battery check
Possible shots
Histogram display
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Quick Control
Shooting mode
White
balance
AF method
Drive/self-timer
Picture Style
Metering mode
Image-recording
quality
Creative filters
Eye-Fi card
transmission status
Switch to auto
selection
(AF point)
Exposure
simulation
Touch shutter
Magnified view
AE lock
Flash-ready/Flash off
Shutter speed
Flash exposure compensation
Aperture
Exposure level indicator/AEB range
AEB/FEB/ Multi Shot
Noise Reduction
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
GPS connection indicator
Digital compass
When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.
If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at
a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of lowor bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect
the exposure setting. Note that noise may be more noticeable than the
actual image recorded.
If you use the <F> or <G> shooting mode, use flash, or set a bulb
exposure, the <g> icon and histogram will be grayed out (for your
reference). The histogram may not be properly displayed in low- or
bright-light conditions.
152
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Scene Icons
In the <A> shooting mode, the camera will detect the scene type and
set everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type
is indicated on the upper left of the screen. For certain scenes or
shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Portrait*1
Movement
Background
Non-Portrait
Background
Nature and
Color
Movement Close*2
Outdoor Scene
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark
With
Tripod
Dark blue
*4*5
*3
*4*5
*3
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:
The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on
a tripod.
<Æ Continued on next page>
153
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II • EF-S 55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II
• EF 300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF 400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later.
*4+*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow
down.
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation reflects the settings of the Picture Style,
white balance and other functions in the Live View image so you can
see what the captured image will look like.
During shooting, the Live View image will automatically reflect the
function settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting
Picture Style
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will
be reflected.
White balance
White balance correction
Extra Effect Shot (in <C> mode)
Creative filters
Ambience-based shots
Light/scene-based shots
Background blur (in <C> mode)
Color tone
Metering mode
Exposure
Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Highlight tone priority
Aspect ratio (image area confirmation)
154
Shooting Function Settings
Function settings particular to Live View shooting are explained here.
Q Quick Control
If you press the <Q> button while the image is displayed on the LCD
monitor in a Creative Zone mode, you can set any of the following: AF
method, Drive/self-timer mode, Metering mode, Image-recording
quality, White balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, and
Creative filters.
In Basic Zone modes, you can set the settings shown in the table on
page 81 (except Background blur), as well as the functions in bold
above.
1
Press the <Q> button.
X The settable functions will be
displayed.
a function and set it.
2 Select
Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
function.
X The selected function and Feature
guide (p.52) will appear.
Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<6> dial to set the function.
In the <8> mode, select the
shooting mode box on the screen’s
upper left, then press the <B>
button to select the shooting mode.
To set Drive/self-timer’s <q>
setting, Picture Style parameters, or
Creative filter effects, press the
<B> button.
155
Shooting Function Settings
the setting.
3 ExitPress
<0> to finalize the setting
and return to Live View shooting.
You can also select [2] to return to
Live View shooting.
In Creative Zone modes, you can set the ISO speed by pressing the
<i> button.
With Live View shooting, you cannot set Drive/self-timer’s <B> and
<M> settings.
When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a metering
circle will be displayed in the center of the screen.
During Live View shooting, the exposure is set at the moment the picture
is taken, regardless of the metering mode.
156
U Using Creative Filters
While viewing the Live View image, you can apply a filter effect (Grainy
B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect, Water painting effect,
Toy camera effect, or Miniature effect) before shooting. These are
called Creative filters.
When you take the picture, the camera saves only the image with the
Creative filter applied. If you also want to save the image without a
Creative filter applied, take the picture without a Creative filter. Then
apply a Creative filter effect and save it as a new image (p.274).
any shooting mode except
1 Set
<x>, <F>, or <G>.
the <Q> button.
2 Press
X The Quick Control screen will appear.
[ ].
3 Select
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[ ] (Creative filter) on the screen’s
right side.
a filter.
4 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<6> dial to select a filter (p.159).
X The image will be displayed with the
selected filter applied.
157
U Using Creative Filters
the filter effect.
5 Adjust
Press the <B> button (except for
Miniature effect).
Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<6> dial to adjust the filter effect,
then press <0>.
For the Miniature effect, press
<0>, then press the <W> <X>
keys to move the white frame to
where you want the image to look
sharp.
the picture.
6 Take
X The image is shot with the filter
applied.
Even if you set Drive/self-timer to <i> or <q>, the camera will still shoot
in single shooting mode.
You cannot shoot with Creative filters if the recording quality is 1+73
or 1 or if AEB, white balance bracketing, or Multi Shot Noise
Reduction is set.
The histogram is not displayed when you shoot with Creative filters.
With Grainy B/W, the grainy effect displayed on the LCD monitor will look
different from the grainy effect recorded in the picture.
With the Soft focus and Miniature effects, the blurred effect displayed on
the LCD monitor will look different from the blurred effect recorded in the
picture. In Creative Zone modes, you can check the picture’s blurred
effect by pressing the depth-of-field preview button.
158
U Using Creative Filters
Creative Filter Characteristics
Grainy B/W
Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the blackand-white effect by adjusting the contrast.
Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness
by adjusting the blur.
Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter expands
the center part of the image, the resolution at the center may
decrease depending on the number of recorded pixels. Check the
image on the screen while setting this filter. The AF method will be
either FlexiZone - Single (fixed at center) or Quick mode (fixed at
center AF point).
Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look threedimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note that
the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendered with a
smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.
Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can adjust the color density. Note that night scenes or dark scenes
may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular
or have significant noise.
159
U Using Creative Filters
Toy camera effect
Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a color tone that makes it
look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the color cast
by adjusting the color tone.
Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks
sharp. In step 5 on page 158, if you press the <u> button (or tap on
[ ] on the lower right), you can switch between the white frame’s
vertical and horizontal orientations. The AF method will be FlexiZone
- Single to focus at the center of the white frame.
160
A Menu Function Settings
The menu options below are displayed.
The settable functions on this menu
screen apply only to Live View
shooting. These functions do not take
effect during viewfinder shooting
(settings are disabled).
Live View shooting
You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].
AF method
You can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], [FlexiZone Single], or [Quick mode]. See pages 164-173 for more about the
AF method.
Continuous AF
The default setting is [Enable].
The camera focuses the subject continuously to achieve rough
focus. This makes it quicker to achieve focus when you press the
shutter button halfway. If [Enable] is set, the lens will operate
constantly and consume more battery power. This will reduce the
number of possible shots (battery life). Also, if the AF method is set
to [Quick mode], Continuous AF will be automatically set to
[Disable]. If you select another AF method, Continuous AF will
revert to the original setting.
During Continuous AF, turn off the power before you set the lens’
focus mode switch to <MF>.
Touch Shutter
Just by tapping the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the
picture automatically. For details, see page 174.
Grid display
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines. You can
check horizontal or vertical tilt when shooting.
161
A Menu Function Settings
Aspect ratioM
The image’s aspect ratio can be set to [3:2], [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1].
The area surrounding the Live View image is masked in black when
the following aspect ratios are set: [4:3] [16:9] [1:1].
JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio. RAW images
will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. The selected aspect
ratio information is added to the RAW image file. When you process
the RAW image with the provided software, this allows you to
generate an image with the same aspect ratio that was set for
shooting. In the case of the [4:3], [16:9], and [1:1] aspect ratios, the
aspect-ratio lines will appear during image playback, but the lines
are not actually drawn on the image.
Image
Quality
3
1
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (approx.)
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
5184x3456
4608x3456
5184x2912*
3456x3456
(17.9 megapixels) (16.0 megapixels) (15.1 megapixels) (11.9 megapixels)
4
3456x2304
3072x2304
3456x1944
2304x2304
(8.0 megapixels) (7.0 megapixels) (6.7 megapixels) (5.3 megapixels)
a
2592x1728
2304x1728
2592x1456*
1728x1728
(4.5 megapixels) (4.0 megapixels) (3.8 megapixels) (3.0 megapixels)
b
1920x1280
1696x1280*
1920x1080
1280x1280
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
c
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
640x480
(310,000 pixels)
720x400*
(290,000 pixels)
480x480
(230,000 pixels)
The asterisked image-recording quality settings do not match the
respective aspect ratio exactly.
The image area displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio is slightly larger
than the recorded area. Check the captured images on the LCD monitor
when shooting.
If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this
camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images may not be correctly printed.
162
A Menu Function Settings
Metering timerM
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time). In Basic Zone modes, metering timer is fixed at 16 sec.
Selecting any of the following operations will stop Live View shooting. To
start Live View shooting again, press the <A> button.
• [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54: Clear settings],
or [54: z firmware ver.]
163
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Selecting the AF Method
You can select an AF method to suit the shooting conditions and your
subject. The following AF methods are provided: [u(face)+Tracking],
[FlexiZone - Multi] (p.166), [FlexiZone - Single] (p.168), and [Quick
mode] (p.172).
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.176).
Select the AF method.
Under the [A] tab, select [AF method].
Select the desired AF method, then
press <0>.
While the Live View image is
displayed, you can also press the
<Q> button to select the AF method
on the Quick Control screen (p.155).
u(face)+Tracking:c
The camera detects and focuses human faces. If a face moves, the AF
point <p> also moves to track the face.
1
Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
an AF point.
2 Select
When a face is detected, the <p>
frame will appear over the face to be
focused.
If multiple faces are detected, <q>
will be displayed. Use <Y> <Z> to
move the <q> frame over the face
you want to focus on.
164
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
You can also tap the LCD monitor
screen to select the face or subject. If
the subject is not a face, < > will be
displayed.
If no faces can be detected, or if you
tap the LCD monitor but do not select
any face or subject, the camera will
switch to [FlexiZone - Multi] with
automatic selection (p.166).
the subject.
3 Focus
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
the picture.
4 TakeCheck
the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.150).
If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. You can prevent this by setting [Continuous AF] to [Enable].
An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
The <p> may cover only part of the face.
165
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
If you press the <L> button, the AF point < > will appear at the center
and you can use the <S> cross keys to move the AF point.
Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the
picture, the <p> will be grayed out. If you press the shutter button
halfway, the subject will be focused in FlexiZone - Multi method with
automatic selection.
FlexiZone - Multi:o
You can use up to 31 AF points for wide-area focusing (automatic
selection). This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for focusing
(zone selection).
1
Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
Area frame
the AF point.N
2 Select
Pressing the <L> button will toggle
between automatic selection and
zone selection. In Basic Zone modes,
automatic selection is set
automatically.
Use the <S> cross keys to select a
zone. To return to the center zone,
press the <L> button again.
You can also tap the LCD monitor
screen to select a zone. When a zone
is selected, tap [
] on the screen
to switch to automatic selection.
166
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
the subject.
3 Focus
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
X If focus is not achieved, the area
frame will turn orange.
the picture.
4 TakeCheck
the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.150).
When the camera does not focus the desired target subject with
automatic AF point selection, switch the AF method to zone selection or
[FlexiZone - Single], and refocus.
Depending on the [A: Aspect ratio] setting, the number of AF points
will differ. At [3:2], there will be 31 AF points. At [1:1] and [4:3], there will
be 25 AF points. And at [16:9], 21 AF points. Also, at [16:9], there will be
only three zones.
For movie shooting, there will be 21 AF points (or 25 AF points if
[640x480] is set) and three zones (or 9 zones if [640x480] is set).
167
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
FlexiZone - Single: d
The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you
want to focus a particular subject.
the Live View image.
1 Display
Press the <A> button.
AF point
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
X The AF point < > will appear.
During movie shooting, if [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable], the AF
point will be displayed in a larger size.
the AF point.
2 Move
Press the <S> cross keys to move the
AF point to where you want to focus. (It
cannot go to the edges of the picture.)
To return the AF point to the center,
press the <L> button.
You can also tap the LCD monitor
screen to move the AF point.
the subject.
3 Focus
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point will
turn green and the beeper will sound.
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
the picture.
4 TakeCheck
the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.150).
168
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Notes for u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi / FlexiZone - Single
AF Operation
Focusing will take longer than with [Quick mode].
Even when focus has been achieved, pressing the shutter button
halfway will focus again.
You cannot focus a moving subject continuously.
The image brightness may change during and after the AF
operation.
If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,
exit Live View shooting and autofocus under the actual light source.
When [FlexiZone - Multi] is set and you press the <u> button (or
tap < > on the screen), the center of the selected zone (or image
center with automatic selection) will be magnified. If you press the
shutter button halfway, the display will return to normal and the
camera will focus.
When [FlexiZone - Single] is set and you press the <u> button (or
tap < > on the screen), the area covered by the AF point will be
magnified. Press the shutter button halfway to focus while in the
magnified view. This is effective when the camera is attached to a
tripod and you need to attain very precise focus. If focusing is
difficult in magnified view, return to the normal display and use AF.
Note that the AF speed may differ between the normal and
magnified views.
If you magnify the view after focusing with [FlexiZone - Multi] or
[FlexiZone - Single] in the normal view, precise focus may not be
achieved.
If [u+Tracking] is set, magnified view is not possible.
169
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces
or when highlight or shadow details are lost.
Subjects in low light.
Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
Subjects with repetitive patterns (skyscraper windows, computer
keyboards, etc.).
Fine lines and subject outlines.
Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
Night scenes or points of light.
Under fluorescent or LED light sources and when the image flickers.
Extremely small subjects.
Subjects at the edge of the picture.
Subjects strongly reflecting light.
The AF point covers both near and distant subjects (such as an
animal in a cage).
Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
Autofocusing while the subject is very far out of focus.
Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
A special effect filter is used.
Noise (spots, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
170
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
If focus is not achieved with the shooting conditions on the preceding
page, set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.
If you use AF with any of the following lenses, using [Quick mode] is
recommended. Autofocusing with [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi] or
[FlexiZone - Single] may take longer or correct focus may not be
achieved.
EF 50mm f/1.4 USM, EF 50mm f/1.8 II, EF 50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro,
EF 75-300mm f/4-5.6 III, EF 75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM
For information on discontinued lenses, refer to your local Canon website.
If you shoot a peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus, aim the
center AF point or zone over the subject to focus, focus again and then
take the picture.
The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series
Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used, the LED
light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.
In magnified view, the higher the magnification, the more difficult
focusing will be because of camera shake during handheld shooting (as
well as when the lens focus mode switch is set to <MF>). Using a tripod
is recommended.
171
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Quick Mode:f
The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in One-Shot AF mode
(p.103), using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting.
Although you can focus the target subject quickly, the Live View image
will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation.
You can use nine AF points to focus (automatic selection). You can also
select one AF point to focus and focus only the area covered by that AF
point (manual selection).
AF point
1
Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
The small boxes are the AF points.
the AF point.N
2 Select
Pressing the <L> button will toggle
between automatic selection and
manual selection. In Basic Zone
modes, automatic selection is set
automatically.
Use the <S> cross keys to select an
AF point. To return the AF point to the
center, press the <L> button again.
You can also tap the LCD monitor
screen to select the AF point. During
manual selection, tap [
] on the
screen to switch to automatic
selection.
172
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
the subject.
3 Focus
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
X The Live View image will turn off, the
reflex mirror will go back down, and
AF will be executed. (No picture is
taken.)
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
that achieved focus will turn green
and the Live View image will
reappear.
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange and blink.
the picture.
4 TakeCheck
the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.150).
When [Quick mode] is set, [Continuous AF] cannot be set (p.161).
The [Quick mode] cannot be set for movie shooting.
You cannot take a picture during autofocusing. Take the picture while the
Live View image is displayed.
173
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Just by tapping the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the
picture automatically. This works in all shooting modes.
1
Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
the touch shutter.
2 Enable
Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.
Each time you tap the icon, it will
toggle between [y] and [x].
[x] (Touch shutter: Enable)
You can focus and shoot by tapping
the screen.
[y] (Touch shutter: Disable)
You can tap to select where you want
to focus. Press the shutter button
completely to take the picture.
to shoot.
3 TapTapthethescreen
face or subject on the screen.
X At the point you tap, the camera will
focus in the AF method that was set
(p.164-173). When [FlexiZone Multi] is set, it will switch to
[FlexiZone - Single].
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
turns green and the picture is taken
automatically.
If focus is not achieved, the AF point
turns orange and the picture cannot
be taken. Tap the face or subject on
the screen again.
174
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Even if you set Drive/self-timer to <i>, the camera will still shoot in
single shooting mode.
The touch shutter does not work with the magnified view.
When [6: Shutter/AE lock button] is set to [1: AE lock/AF] or [3: AE/
AF, no AE lock] under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], autofocusing
does not take effect.
You can also set the touch shutter with [A: Touch shutter].
To take a bulb exposure, tap the screen twice. The first tap on the screen
will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the exposure. Be
careful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen.
175
MF: Focusing Manually
You can magnify the image and focus precisely with manual focus.
1
Set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>.
Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.
the magnifying frame.
2 Display
Press the <u> button.
X The magnifying frame will appear.
You can also tap [ ] on the screen to
magnify the image.
the magnifying frame.
3 Move
Press the <S> cross keys to move
Magnifying frame
the magnifying frame to the position
where you want to focus.
To return to the screen’s center, press
the <L> button.
the image.
4 Magnify
Each time you press the <u> button,
the magnification within the frame will
change as follows:
1x 9 5x 9 10x 9 Normal view
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification
176
MF: Focusing Manually
manually.
5 Focus
While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
After achieving focus, press the <u>
button to return to the normal view.
the picture.
6 TakeCheck
the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button to take the
picture (p.150).
177
Live View Shooting Cautions
Image Quality
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image.
If Live View shooting is used continuously for a long period, the camera’s
internal temperature may rise, and image quality may deteriorate.
Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.
If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a
few minutes before shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live View shooting
or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red <E> icon will appear.
The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. You should exit Live View shooting and allow the camera’s
internal temperature to cool before shooting again.
The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit Live View shooting or turn
off the power and let the camera rest for a while.
Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
will cause the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not
shooting, turn off the camera.
If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the image quality of high ISO speed images
or long exposures may deteriorate even before the white <s> icon is displayed.
Shooting Result
If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out as
desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture. In magnified view,
the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in orange. Even if you take the
picture in magnified view, the image will be captured in the normal view range.
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.130) is set to other than [Disable],
the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation
or decreased flash exposure compensation is set.
If you use a TS-E lens (except the TS-E 17mm f/4L or TS-E 24mm f/3.5L
II) and shift or tilt the lens or use an Extension Tube, the standard
exposure may not be obtained or an irregular exposure may result.
178
Live View Shooting Cautions
Live View Image
Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed
Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image
recorded will have minimal noise. (The image quality of the Live View
image is different from that of the recorded image.)
If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen
may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume shooting
under the actual light source.
If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
If there is a very bright light source in the picture, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image
will correctly show the bright area.
In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise
or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the
noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
Custom Functions
During Live View shooting, some Custom Function settings will not take
effect (p.299).
Lens and Flash
The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when
using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode,
available since the second half of 2011.
FE lock is not possible when the built-in flash or an external Speedlite is
used. Modeling flash will not work with an external Speedlite.
Do not hold the camera in the same posture for long periods of times
as this may cause low-temperature contact burns. Even if the camera
does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness or blistering. The use of a tripod is recommended for people
with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in
very hot places.
179
6
Shooting Movies
Movie shooting is enabled by
setting the power switch to
<k>. The movie recording
format will be MOV.
For cards that can record movies, see page 3.
Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with HighDefinition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning
lines).
181
k Shooting Movies
Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to play back the
movies shot (p.262, 265).
Autoexposure Shooting
When the shooting mode is set to other than <a>, autoexposure
control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness.
1
Set the power switch to <k>.
X The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
any shooting mode except
2 Set
<a>.
the subject.
3 Focus
Before shooting a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (p.164-173, 176).
By default, [Movie Servo AF:
Enable] is set so that the camera will
always focus. To stop Movie Servo
AF, see page 207.
the movie.
4 Shoot
Press the <A> button to start
Recording movie
Microphone
182
shooting a movie. To stop movie
shooting, press <A> again.
X While the movie is being shot, the
“o” mark will be displayed on the
upper right of the screen.
k Shooting Movies
Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 212 and 213.
If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages
178 and 179.
In Basic Zone modes, the shooting result will be the same as with <A>.
Also, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera is displayed
on the upper left (p.184).
In the <f> and <s> shooting modes, the settings will be the same
as in the <d> mode.
Settable menu functions will differ between Basic Zone modes and
Creative Zone modes (p.320).
The ISO speed (100-6400), shutter speed, and aperture are set
automatically.
In Creative Zone modes, you can press the <A> button (p.127) to lock
the exposure (AE lock). The exposure setting will be displayed for the
number of seconds set with [Z1: Metering timer]. After applying AE
lock during movie shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the <S>
button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the <S> button.)
In Creative Zone modes, you can hold down the <O> button and turn
the <6> dial to set the exposure compensation.
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed and ISO
speed on the screen’s bottom. This is the exposure setting for taking a
still photo (p.187). The exposure setting for movie shooting is not
displayed. Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ
from that for still photo shooting.
If you shoot a movie with autoexposure, the shutter speed and aperture
will not be recorded in the image information (Exif).
Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately)
Equipped with an LED Light
With autoexposure (modes other than a) movie shooting, the camera
will automatically turn on the Speedlite’s LED light under low-light
conditions. For details, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
183
k Shooting Movies
Scene Icons
During movie shooting in a Basic Zone mode, an icon representing the
scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be
adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the
icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Non-Portrait
Portrait*1
Background
Nature and
Outdoor Scene
Close*2
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark blue
Dark
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
184
k Shooting Movies
Manual Exposure Shooting
In the <a> mode, you can freely set the shutter speed, aperture, and
ISO speed for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies
is for advanced users.
1
Set the power switch to <k>.
X The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
2 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
the shutter speed and
3 Set
aperture.
<6>
To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. The settable shutter
speeds depend on the frame rate
<9>.
• 8/7
: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
• 6/5/4 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
To set the aperture, hold down the
<O> button and turn the <6>
dial.
<O> + <6>
4
Set the ISO speed.
Press the <i> button and press
the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the <6>
dial to select the ISO speed.
For details on the ISO speed, see the
next page.
185
k Shooting Movies
and shoot the movie.
5 Focus
The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.182).
ISO Speed During Manual Exposure Shooting
With [Auto], the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 ISO 6400.
You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 6400 in
whole-stop increments. Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if
[2: ISO expansion] is set to [1: On], the manual setting range will
expand so you can also select H (equivalent to ISO 12800).
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone
priority] is set to [1: Enable], the ISO speed will be ISO 200 - ISO
6400.
Since shooting a movie at ISO 12800 may result in much noise, it is
designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as “H”).
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to
[1: On] and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting, the
manual setting range’s maximum will be H (equivalent to ISO 12800).
Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not
revert to the original setting.
Exposure compensation cannot be set.
Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not
recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.187)
compared to when the <A> button was pressed.
By pressing the <B> button, you can display the histogram.
When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
186
k Shooting Movies
Information Display
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change.
AF method
• c : u+Tracking
• o : FlexiZone - Multi
• d : FlexiZone - Single
Movie shooting mode
: Autoexposure
(Basic Zone
modes)
: Autoexposure
(Creative Zone
modes)
: Manual exposure
Possible shots
Movie shooting remaining time* /
Elapsed time
Battery check
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Drive/
self-timer
Quick Control
White balance
Image-recording
quality
Movie recording size
Picture Style
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Miniature effect
movie
Eye-Fi card
transmission status
Frame rate
Video snapshots
Movie Servo AF
Exposure mode
L: Autoexposure
K: Manual
exposure
AE lock
LED light
Shutter speed
Aperture
GPS connection indicator
Digital compass
Exposure level indicator
Magnified view
Recording level: Manual
ISO speed
Attenuator
Highlight tone priority
Wind filter
* Applies to a single movie clip.
When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will change
to the elapsed time.
187
k Shooting Movies
Notes on Movie Shooting
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may
damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.
If <Q> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie
shooting, the white balance may also change.
If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may
flicker.
Zooming the lens during movie shooting is not recommended. Zooming
the lens can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the
lens’ maximum aperture changes or not. Exposure changes may be
recorded as a result.
You cannot magnify the image during movie shooting.
Be careful not to cover the microphone (p.182) with your finger, etc.
Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 212 and 213.
If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages
178 and 179.
Movie-related settings are under the [Z1] and [Z2] tabs (p.207).
A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size
exceeds 4 GB, a new file will be created for every subsequent 4 GB.
The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie recording
size set to [A]).
Monaural sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (p.182).
Most commercially-available external stereo microphones with a 3.5 mm
diameter mini plug can be connected to the camera.
You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.309) to start
and stop the movie shooting if Drive/self-timer is <Q>. Set the shooting
timing switch to <2> (2-sec. delay), then press the transmit button. If the
switch is set to <o> (immediate shooting), still photo shooting will take
effect.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E12, the total movie shooting time
will be as follows: approx. 1 hr. 5 min. at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
and approx. 1 hr. at low temperatures (0°C/32°F).
The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a
(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, available
since the second half of 2011.
188
k Shooting Movies
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation is a function that allows you to see the
effects of the Picture Style, white balance, etc., on the image.
During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically reflect
the effects of the settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting
Picture Style
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will
be reflected.
White balance
White balance correction
Exposure
Depth of field
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Highlight tone priority
Miniature effect movie
189
k Shooting Movies
Shooting Still Photos
While shooting a movie, you can also
take a still photo by pressing the shutter
button completely.
Taking Still Photos during Movie Shooting
If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record
a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.
The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie
shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is
displayed.
The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card.
Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below. Other
functions will be the same as for movie shooting.
Function
Settings
ImageRecording
Quality
As set in [z1: Image quality].
When the movie recording size is [1920x1080] or [1280x720],
the aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [640x480], the
aspect ratio will be 4:3.
ISO Speed*
• With autoexposure shooting: Automatically set within ISO 100 6400.
• With manual exposure shooting: See “ISO Speed During
Manual-exposure Shooting” on page 186.
Exposure
Setting
• With autoexposure shooting: Automatically-set shutter speed and
aperture (displayed when pressing the shutter button halfway).
• With manual exposure shooting: Manually-set shutter speed
and aperture.
AEB
Canceled
Flash
Flash off
* If highlight tone priority is set, the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.
Regardless of the Drive/self-timer setting, single shooting will take effect for
still photo shooting during movie shooting.
190
k Shooting Movies
When you press the shutter button halfway to autofocus during movie
shooting, the following phenomena may occur.
• Focus may become far off momentarily.
• The brightness of the recorded movie may be different from that of the
actual scene.
• The recorded movie may be momentarily still.
• The movie may record the lens operation noise.
• You cannot shoot still photos when focus is not achieved, such as when
the subject is moving.
191
Shooting Function Settings
Function settings particular to movie shooting are explained here.
Q Quick Control
If you press the <Q> button while the image is displayed on the LCD
monitor, you can set any of the following: AF method, Drive/self-timer
mode, Image-recording quality (still photos), Movie recording size,
Video snapshots, White balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer,
and Miniature effect movie.
In Basic Zone modes, only the functions in bold can be set.
1
Press the <Q> button. (7)
X The settable functions will be
displayed.
a function and set it.
2 Select
Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
function.
X The selected function and Feature
guide (p.52) will appear.
Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<6> dial to set the function.
To set Drive/self-timer’s <q> setting
or Picture Style parameters, press the
<B> button.
the setting.
3 ExitPress
<0> to finalize the setting
and return to movie shooting.
You can also select <2> to return to
movie shooting.
192
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
The menu option [Z2: Movie rec. size]
enables you to select the movie’s image
size [****x****] and frame rate [9]
(frames recorded per second). The 9
(frame rate) switches automatically
depending on the [52: Video system]
setting.
Image Size
A [1920x1080] : Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality.
The aspect ratio will be 16:9.
B [1280x720] : High-Definition (HD) recording quality. The
aspect ratio will be 16:9.
C [640x480]
: Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect
ratio will be 4:3.
Frame Rate (fps: frames per second)
6/8 : For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America,
Japan, Korea, Mexico, etc.).
5/7 : For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia,
China, Australia, etc.).
4
: Mainly for motion pictures.
193
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
Movie Recording
Size
Total Recording Time (approx.)
4 GB Card
8 GB Card
16 GB Card
File Size
(approx.)
11 min.
22 min.
44 min.
330 MB/min.
11 min.
22 min.
44 min.
330 MB/min.
46 min.
1 hr. 32 min.
3 hr. 4 min.
82.5 MB/min.
6
[1920x1080]
5
4
[1280x720]
[640x480]
8
7
6
5
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reaches
the 4 GB file size, the elapsed shooting time displayed in the movie
shooting screen will start blinking. If you keep shooting until the
movie file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created
automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code will stop
blinking.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file
individually. Movie files cannot play back consecutively
automatically. After the movie playback ends, select the next movie
to be played.
Movie Shooting Time Limit
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by
pressing the <A> button. (A new movie file starts being recorded.)
An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting
to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table above
(p.212).
194
3 Shooting Miniature Effect Movies
You can shoot movies having a Miniature (diorama) effect. Select the
playback speed and shoot.
1
Press the <Q> button.
X The Quick Control screen will appear.
[ ].
2 Select
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[ ] (Miniature effect movie) on the
right of the screen.
the playback speed.
3 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the
<6> dial to select [5x], [10x], or
[20x], then press <0>.
the white frame over the
4 Position
part you want to look sharp.
Press the <W> <X> keys to move the
white frame over the part to look
sharp.
To switch the white frame’s vertical/
horizontal orientation, press the <u>
button (or tap [ ] on the screen’s
lower right).
195
3 Shooting Miniature Effect Movies
the movies.
5 Shoot
The AF method will be FlexiZone Single to focus at the center of the
white frame.
The white frame is not displayed
while you shoot.
Playback Speed and Length (for 1-minute movie)
Speed
(5x)
Playback Length
Approx. 12 sec.
(10x)
Approx. 6 sec.
(20x)
Approx. 3 sec.
Sound will not be recorded.
With Miniature effect movies, Movie Servo AF will not work.
Miniature effect movies cannot be set if video snapshot has been set.
You cannot take still photos while shooting a Miniature effect movie.
Movies whose playback time is shorter than 1 sec. cannot be edited
(p.256).
196
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
You can shoot a series of short movie clips lasting approx. 2 sec., 4
sec., or 8 sec. called video snapshots. The video snapshots can be
joined together into a single movie called a video snapshot album. You
can thereby show quick highlights of a trip or event.
A video snapshot album can also be played together with background
music (p.204, 255).
Video Snapshot Album Concept
Video
snapshot 1
Video
snapshot 2
Video
snapshot x
Video snapshot album
Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration
1
Select [Video snapshot].
Under the [Z2] tab, select [Video
snapshot], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
197
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
[Album settings].
3 Select
Select [Album settings], then press
<0>.
If you want to continue shooting for
an existing album, go to “Adding to
Existing Album” (p.202).
[Create a new album].
4 Select
Select [Create a new album], then
press <0>.
the snapshot length.
5 Select
Press <0>, press the <W> <X>
keys to select the snapshot’s length,
then press <0>.
[OK].
6 Select
Select [OK], then press <0>.
Shooting duration
198
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu. A blue bar will appear to
indicate the snapshot length.
Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.199).
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Creating a Video Snapshot Album
the first video snapshot.
7 Shoot
Press the <A> button, then shoot.
X The blue bar indicating the shooting
duration will gradually decrease. After
the set shooting duration elapses, the
shooting stops automatically.
X The confirmation dialog will appear
(p.200, 201).
as a video snapshot album.
8 Save
Select [J Save as album], then
press <0>.
X The movie clip will be saved as the
video snapshot album’s first video
snapshot.
to shoot more video
9 Continue
snapshots.
Repeat step 7 to shoot the next video
snapshot.
Select [J Add to album], then press
<0>.
To create another video snapshot
album, select [W Save as a new
album].
Repeat step 9 as necessary.
video snapshot shooting.
10 ExitSetthe[Video
snapshot] to [Disable].
To return to normal movie
shooting, be sure to set [Disable].
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to the normal movie
shooting screen.
199
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Options in Steps 8 and 9
Function
Description
J Save as album
(Step 8)
The movie clip will be saved as the video
snapshot album’s first video snapshot.
J Add to album
(Step 9)
The video snapshot just recorded will be added
to the album recorded immediately before.
W Save as a new album
(Step 9)
A new video snapshot album is created and the
movie clip is saved as the first video snapshot.
The new album will be a different file from the
previously recorded album.
1 Playback video snapshot The video snapshot just recorded will be played.
(Steps 8 and 9)
For playback operations, see the next page.
r Do not save to album
(Step 8)
r Delete without saving to
album (Step 9)
The video snapshot you just recorded will be
erased instead of being saved to the album.
Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
If you want to shoot another video snapshot
right after shooting one video snapshot, set
[Show confirm msg] to [Disable]. This
setting will allow you to immediately shoot the
next video snapshot without the confirmation
message appearing after you shoot each
time.
200
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
[Playback video snapshot] Operations
Function
Playback Description
7 Play
By pressing <0>, you can play or pause the justrecorded video snapshot.
5 First frame
Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.
Skip backward*
Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips
back by a few seconds.
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is
3 Previous frame displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the
movie.
6 Next frame
Skip forward*
4 Last frame
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the
movie.
Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips
forward by a few seconds.
Displays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
9 Volume
You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.254) volume by
turning the <6> dial.
32
Pressing the <M> button returns to the previous
screen.
* With [Skip backward] and [Skip forward], the skipping duration will correspond
to the number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or
8 sec.).
201
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Adding to Existing Album
1
Select [Add to existing album].
Follow step 4 on page 198 to select
[Add to existing album], then press
<0>.
an existing album.
2 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
an existing album, then press <0>.
After confirming the dialog displayed,
select [OK] on the screen, then press
<0>.
X Certain video snapshot settings will
change to match the existing album’s
settings.
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
X The video snapshot shooting screen
will appear.
the video snapshot.
3 Shoot
Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.199).
You cannot select an album shot with another camera.
202
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots
You can add to an album only video snapshots with the same duration
(approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each).
Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a
new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.
• Changing the [Movie rec. size] (p.193).
• Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto] or [Manual] to
[Disable] or from [Disable] to [Auto] or [Manual] (p.210).
• Updating the firmware.
You cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot.
The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate.
Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during
playback may not be exact.
203
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Playing an Album
You can play the completed video snapshot album in the same way as a
normal movie (p.254).
1
Play back the movie.
Press the <x> button to display
image.
the album.
2 Select
In the single-image display, the
[
] icon displayed on the upper
left of the screen indicates a video
snapshot album.
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a
video snapshot album.
back the album.
3 PlayPress
<W>.
On the movie playback panel
displayed, select [7] (Play), then
press <0>.
Background Music
You can play background music when you play back albums, normal
movies, and slide shows on the camera (p.255, 258). To play
background music, you must first copy the background music to the card
using EOS Utility (provided software). For information on how to copy the
background music, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private
enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder.
204
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Editing an Album
After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video
snapshots in the album.
1
Select [X].
On the movie playback panel
displayed, select [X] (Edit), then
press <0>.
X The editing screen will be displayed.
an editing operation.
2 Select
Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select an
editing operation, then press <0>.
Function
Description
Move snapshot
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot
you want to move, then press <0>. Press the <Y>
<Z> keys to move the video snapshot, then press
<0>.
Delete snapshot
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot
you want to delete, then press <0>. The [L] icon will
be displayed on the selected video snapshot. Pressing
<0> again will cancel the selection and [L] will
disappear.
Play snapshot
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot
you want to play, then press <0>.
205
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
the edited album.
3 Save
Press the <M> button to return to
the Editing panel at the screen’s
bottom.
Select [W] (Save), then press
<0>.
X The save screen will appear.
To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
When the battery level is low, editing albums is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.
Provided Software Usable with Albums
EOS Video Snapshot Task: Enables the editing of albums. This is an
add-on function for ImageBrowser EX.
206
3 Menu Function Settings
When you set the power switch to <k>, the [Z1] and [Z2] tab will
show functions dedicated to movie shooting. The menu options are as
follows.
[Z1] menu
[Z2] menu
AF method
The AF methods are the same as described on pages 164-170. You
can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone Single]. For movie shooting, [Quick mode] cannot be used.
Movie Servo AF
During movie shooting, the camera focuses the subject
continuously. The default setting is [Enable].
When [Enable] is set:
• Even if you do not press the shutter button halfway, the camera will
continue focusing the subject.
• Since the lens is always operating, it will consume battery power
and the movie shooting time (p.194) will be shorter.
• Depending on the lens, the focusing noise may be recorded. To
reduce the recording of the lens operation noise, use a
commercially-available external microphone. With EF-S 18-135mm
f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens, the lens operation noise will be minimal.
• During Movie Servo AF, turn off the camera’s power before you set
the lens’ focus mode switch to <MF>.
207
3 Menu Function Settings
• If you want to stop focusing at the target spot or if you do not want
the lens operation noise to be recorded, you can temporarily stop
Movie Servo AF as follows. When you stop Movie Servo AF, the
AF point will turn gray. When you perform the same steps below,
Movie Servo AF will resume.
• Press the <D> button.
• Tap the [ ] icon on the lower left of the screen.
• If [6: Shutter/AE lock button] is set to [2: AF/AF lock, no AE
lock] in the [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], Movie Servo AF
will stop while you hold down the <A> button. When you let go
of the <A> button, Movie Servo AF will resume.
• While Movie Servo AF is stopped, if you press a button such as
<M> or <x> and then return to movie shooting, Movie Servo
AF will resume.
When [Disable] is set:
• Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.
Also see “Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult” on page 170.
• During zooming or image magnification, Movie Servo AF will temporarily
stop.
• During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if
you move the camera vertically or horizontally (panning), the
recorded movie image may momentarily expand or contract (change
in image magnification).
208
3 Menu Function Settings
AF with shutter button during movie recording
When you press the shutter button while shooting a movie, you can
shoot a still photo. The default setting is [ONE SHOT].
• When [ONE SHOT] is set:
• You can refocus and shoot a still photo by pressing the shutter
button halfway while shooting a movie.
• When shooting a static subject (not moving), you can perform
shooting in precise focus.
• When [Disable] is set:
• You can immediately start shooting a still photo by pressing the
shutter button, even though focus is not achieved. This is
effective when you want to give priority to the shooting
opportunity rather than to focus.
Grid display
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines. You can
check horizontal or vertical tilt when shooting.
Metering timer N
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
Movie recording size
You can set the movie recording size (image size and frame rate).
For details, see pages 193-194.
209
3 Menu Function Settings
Sound recording N
Level meter
The built-in microphone records
monaural sound. If a commerciallyavailable microphone equipped with a
mini plug (3.5 mm diameter) is
connected to the camera’s external
microphone IN terminal (p.22), it will be
given priority.
Sound recording options
[Auto]
: The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically.
Auto level control will operate automatically in
response to the sound level.
[Manual] : For advanced users. You can adjust the soundrecording level to one of 64 levels.
Select [Rec. level] and look at the level meter while
pressing the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust the soundrecording level. While looking at the peak hold
indicator (approx. 3 sec.), adjust so that the level
meter sometimes lights up the “12” (-12 dB) mark on
the right for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the
sound will be distorted.
[Disable] : Sound will not be recorded.
[Wind filter]
When set to [Enable], it reduces wind noise when there is wind
outdoors. This feature takes effect only with the built-in
microphone.
Note that [Enable] will also reduce low bass sounds, so set this
function to [Disable] when there is no wind. It will record a more
natural sound than with [Enable].
[Attenuator]
Even if you set [Sound recording] to [Auto] or [Manual] before
shooting, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud
sound. In such a case, setting it to [Enable] is recommended.
210
3 Menu Function Settings
In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] will
be [On] or [Off]. If [On] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted
automatically (same as with [Auto]). However, the wind filter function will
not take effect.
The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
Both L and R record audio at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
Video snapshots
You can shoot video snapshots. For details, see page 197.
211
3 Menu Function Settings
Movie Shooting Cautions
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red <E>
icon will appear.
The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. You should stop still shooting and allow the camera’s internal
temperature to cool before shooting again. Since movie image quality
will hardly be affected, you can still shoot movies.
The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause
the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, turn
off the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie
shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots. If you use a
tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, it is recommended to set
the IS switch to <2>.
The camera’s built-in microphone will also pick up camera operation
noise. Using a commercially-available external microphone can prevent
(or reduce) these noises from being recorded.
Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting or if AF
operates during movie shooting, that part may look momentarily still when
you play the movie. In such cases, shoot movies with manual exposure.
If there is a very bright light source in the picture, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded in almost
the same way you see it on the LCD monitor.
In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie
will be recorded in almost the same way you see it on the LCD monitor.
212
Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie
shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer
memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will
climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting
will stop automatically.
Indicator
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either
not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.
First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
Still Photo Shooting During Movie Shooting
Regarding the image quality of still photos, see “Image Quality” on page
178.
Playback and TV connection
If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.262, 265) and shoot a movie,
the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the
sound will be properly recorded.
Do not hold the camera in the same posture for long periods of times
as this may cause low-temperature contact burns. Even if the camera
does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness or blistering. The use of a tripod is recommended for people
with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in
very hot places.
213
7
Handy Features
Disabling the Beeper (p.216)
Card Reminder (p.216)
Setting the Image Review Time (p.217)
Setting the Auto Power-off Time (p.217)
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness (p.218)
Creating and Selecting a Folder (p.219)
File Numbering Methods (p.221)
Setting Copyright Information (p.223)
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images (p.225)
Checking Camera Settings (p.226)
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings (p.227)
Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off Automatically
(p.230)
Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color (p.230)
Setting the Flash (p.231)
Automatic Sensor Cleaning (p.236)
Appending Dust Delete Data (p.237)
Manual Sensor Cleaning (p.239)
215
Handy Features
3 Disabling the Beeper
You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved,
during self-timer operation, and during touch screen operations.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Beep], then
press <0>. Select [Disable], then
press <0>.
To silence the beeper only during touch
screen operations, select [Touch to ].
3 Card Reminder
This setting prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Release
shutter without card], then press
<0>. Select [Disable], then press
<0>.
If there is no card inserted in the camera
and you press the shutter button, “Card”
will be displayed in the viewfinder, and
you cannot release the shutter.
216
Handy Features
3 Setting the Image Review Time
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor
immediately after capture. If [Off] is set, the image will not be displayed
immediately after image capture. If [Hold] is set, the image review will
be displayed up until the [Auto power off] time.
During image review, if you operate any camera controls such as
pressing the shutter button halfway, the image review will end.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>. Select the
desired setting, then press <0>.
3 Setting the Auto Power-off Time
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after the set
time of idle operation elapses. You can set this auto power-off time.
When the camera has turned off due to auto power off, you can turn it
on again by pressing the shutter button halfway or pressing any of the
following buttons: <M>, <B>, <x>, <A>, etc.
If [Disable] is set, either turn off the camera or press the <B>
button to turn off the LCD monitor to save battery power.
Even when [Disable] is set, if the camera is not used for 30 min.,
the LCD monitor will turn off automatically. To turn on the LCD
monitor again, press the <B> button.
Under the [52] tab, select [Auto power
off], then press <0>. Select the
desired setting, then press <0>.
217
Handy Features
3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to
read.
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>. Press
the <Y><Z> keys to adjust the
brightness on the adjustment screen,
then press <0>.
When checking the exposure of an
image, set the LCD monitor brightness to
4 and prevent the ambient light from
affecting the reviewed image.
218
Handy Features
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for
saving captured images.
Creating a Folder
1
Select [Select folder].
Under the [51] tab, select [Select
folder], then press <0>.
[Create folder].
2 Select
Select [Create folder], then press
<0>.
a new folder.
3 Create
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X A new folder with the folder number
increased by one is created.
219
Handy Features
Selecting a Folder
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder
With the folder selection screen
displayed, select a folder and press
<0>.
X The folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
Subsequent captured images will be
recorded into the selected folder.
Folder name
Highest file number
Folders
As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can
contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is
created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.222) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format
“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.
The final five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case
letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be
used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit
folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the
other five characters in each name are different.
220
Handy Features
3 File Numbering Methods
The image files will be numbered from 0001 to 9999 in the order the
images are taken, then saved in a folder. You can change how the file
number is assigned.
The file number will appear on your computer in this format:
IMG_0001.JPG.
Under the [51] tab, select [File
numbering], then press <0>. The
available settings are described below.
Select the option, then press <0>.
[Continuous]: The file numbering continues in sequence even
after you replace the card or create a folder.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file
numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is convenient
when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001
to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in your computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may
continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card
or in the folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is
recommended that you use a newly-formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card-1
XXX-0051
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card-1
Card-2
XXX-0052
100
101
XXX-0051
XXX-0052
Next sequential file number
221
Handy Features
[Auto reset]: The file numbering restarts from 0001 each time
the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering
restarts from 0001 for the new images saved. This is convenient if
you want to organize images according to cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may
continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card
or in the folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering
starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card-1
XXX-0051
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card-2
100-0001
Card-1
100
101
XXX-0051
XXX-0001
File numbering is reset
[Manual reset]: To reset the file numbering to 0001 manually or
to start from file number 0001 in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder
starts from 0001.
This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images
taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the
manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.
(There will be no manual reset confirmation screen.)
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie
file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG
images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “.MOV” for movies.
222
Handy Features
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
When you set the copyright information, it will be appended to the
image as Exif information.
1
Select [Copyright information].
Under the [54] tab, select [Copyright
information], then press <0>.
the option to be set.
2 Select
Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
X The text entry screen will appear.
Select [Display copyright info.] to
check the copyright information
currently set.
Select [Delete copyright
information] to delete the copyright
information currently set.
text.
3 Enter
Refer to “Text Entry Procedure” on
the next page and enter the copyright
information.
Enter up to 63 alphanumeric
characters and symbols.
the setting.
4 ExitAfter
entering the text, press the
<M> button to exit.
On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK], then press <0>.
223
Handy Features
Text Entry Procedure
Changing the Entry Area:
Press the <O> button to toggle
between the top and bottom entry
areas.
Moving the Cursor:
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to move
the cursor.
Entering Text:
In the bottom area, press the <S> cross keys or turn the <6> dial
to select a character, then press <0> to enter it.
Changing the Entry Mode:*
Select [
] at the bottom right of the bottom entry area. Each
time you press <0>, the entry mode will change as follows: Lower
case 9 Numerals / Symbols 1 9 Numerals / Symbols 2 9 Upper
case.
* When [Touch control: Disable] is set, you can display all the available
characters on one screen.
Deleting a Character:
Press the <L> button to delete one character.
Exiting:
Press the <M> button, check the text, select [OK], then press
<0>. The screen in step 2 will reappear.
Canceling the Text Entry:
Press the <B> button, check the text, select [OK], then press
<0>. The screen in step 2 will reappear.
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility
(provided software, p.365).
224
Handy Features
3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD
monitor and on the computer instead of horizontally.
You can change the setting for this feature.
Under the [51] tab, select [Auto rotate],
then press <0>. The available
settings are described below. Select the
option, then press <0>.
[OnzD] : The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback
on both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.
[OnD]
: The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the
computer.
[Off]
: The vertical image is not automatically rotated.
FAQ
The vertical image is not rotated during the image review
immediately after it is captured.
Press the <x> button and the image playback will display the rotated image.
[OnzD] is set, but the image does not rotate during playback.
Auto rotate will not work with vertical images captured while [Auto
rotate] was set to [Off]. If the vertical image is taken while the camera
is pointed up or down, the image may not be rotated automatically for
playback. In such a case, see “Rotating the Image” on page 247.
On the camera’s LCD monitor, I want to rotate an image
captured when [OnD] had been set.
Set [OnzD], then play back the image. It will be rotated.
The vertical image does not rotate on the computer screen.
The software used is not compatible with image rotation. Use the
software provided with the camera instead.
225
Handy Features
B Checking Camera Settings
While the shooting settings (p.50) are displayed, press the <B>
button to display the camera’s major function settings.
Settings display
Card remaining capacity
Color space (p.146)
WB correction (p.144)/
WB bracketing (p.145)
Touch control (p.55)
Red-eye reduction (p.112)
Auto rotate display (p.225)
LCD auto off (p.230)
Date/Time (p.37)
Daylight saving time (p.37)
Beeper (p.216)
Auto power off (p.217)
Sensor cleaning (p.236)
Live View shooting (p.149)
226
Handy Features
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN
The camera’s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to
their defaults. This option is available in Creative Zone modes.
1
Select [Clear settings].
Under the [54] tab, select [Clear
settings], then press <0>.
[Clear all camera settings].
2 Select
Select [Clear all camera settings],
then press <0>.
[OK].
3 Select
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X Setting [Clear all camera settings]
will reset the camera to the default
settings as shown on the next page.
FAQ
Clearing all camera settings:
After the procedure above, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)]
in [54: Clear settings] to clear all the Custom Function settings
(p.298).
227
Handy Features
Shooting settings
Recording Images
<8> mode
C (Kids)
Image quality
73
AF operation
One-Shot AF
Picture Style
Auto
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Standard
Automatic
AF point selection
selection
ISO speed
AUTO (Auto)
Peripheral
illumination
correction
Chromatic
aberration
correction
Color space
ISO Auto
Maximum 6400
White balance
Q (Auto)
Exposure
compensation/
AEB
Canceled
Custom White
Balance
Canceled
Flash exposure
compensation
0 (Zero)
White balance
correction
Canceled
White balance
bracketing
Canceled
Drive/self-timer
u
(Single shooting)
Metering mode
q (Evaluative
metering)
Custom Functions Unchanged
External flash
function setting
Enable/Correction
data retained
Disable/Correction
data retained
sRGB
Unchanged
Long exposure
Disable
noise reduction
High ISO speed Standard
noise reduction
File numbering Continuous
228
Auto cleaning
Enable
Dust Delete
Data
Erase
Handy Features
Camera Settings
Live View shooting
Auto power off
30 sec.
Live View shooting Enable
Beep
Enable
AF method
Release shutter
without card
Enable
u+Tracking
Continuous AF
Enable
Touch Shutter
Disable
Off
Image review
2 sec.
Grid display
Histogram display
Brightness
Aspect ratio
3:2
Metering timer
16 sec.
Image jump with 6 e (10 images)
Auto rotate
OnzD
Movie Shooting
LCD brightness
LCD auto off
Enable
AF method
u+Tracking
Date/Time/Zone
Unchanged
Movie Servo AF
Enable
Language
Unchanged
Video system
Unchanged
Screen color
1
AF with shutter
button during
movie recording
Grid display
Feature guide
Enable
Metering timer
16 sec.
Touch control
Standard
1920x1080
Switch S / A
button
Movie recording
size
Disable
Copyright
information
Unchanged
Control over HDMI
Disable
ONE SHOT
Off
Sound recording
Auto
Video snapshots
Disable
Eye-Fi transmission Disable
My Menu settings
Unchanged
Display from My
Menu
Disable
229
Handy Features
3 Preventing the LCD Monitor from Turning Off
Automatically
You can prevent the display-off sensor from turning off the shooting
setting display on the LCD monitor when your eye approaches the
viewfinder.
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD auto
off], then press <0>. Select
[Disable], then press <0>.
3 Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color
You can change the background color of the shooting settings screen.
Under the [53] tab, select [Screen
color], then press <0>. Select the
desired color, then press <0>.
When you exit the menu, the selected
color will be displayed for the shooting
settings screen.
230
3 Setting the FlashN
The built-in flash and external Speedlite settings can be set with the
camera’s menu. You can use the camera’s menu to set the external
Speedlite function settings only if an EX-series Speedlite compatible
with this function is attached.
The setting procedure is the same as when setting a camera menu
function.
Select [Flash control].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Flash
control], then press <0>.
X The flash control screen will appear.
[Flash firing]
Normally, set this to [Enable].
If [Disable] is set, neither the builtin flash nor the external Speedlite
will fire. This is useful when you only
want to use the flash’s AF-assist
beam.
[E-TTL II meter.]
For normal flash exposures, set this
to [Evaluative].
[Average] is for advanced users. As
with an external Speedlite, the
metering area is averaged. Flash
exposure compensation may be
necessary.
Even if [Flash firing] is set to [Disable], if focus is difficult to achieve in low
light, the built-in flash may still fire a series of flashes (AF-assist beam,
p.106).
231
3 Setting the FlashN
[Flash sync. speed in Av mode]
You can set the flash sync speed for
flash photography in the aperture-priority
AE (f) mode.
: Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200
sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is
also possible.
: 1/200-1/60 sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,
the background may come out dark.
: 1/200 sec. (fixed)
The flash sync speed is fixed at 1/200 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60 sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out
darker than with [1/200-1/60 sec. auto].
If [1/200-1/60 sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is
not possible in the <f> mode.
232
3 Setting the FlashN
[Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. setting]
You can set the functions in the table below. The functions displayed under
[External flash func. setting] will vary depending on the Speedlite model.
Select [Built-in flash settings] or
[External flash func. setting].
X The flash functions will be displayed.
With [Built-in flash settings], the
highlighted functions can be selected
and set.
Sample screen
Flash mode
Wireless functions
Flash zoom (Flash
coverage)
Flash exposure
bracketing
Flash exposure
compensation
[Built-in flash settings]
[External flash func. setting]
Shutter
synchronization
[Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. setting] Functions
Function
Flash mode
Shutter
synchronization
FEB*
Wireless
functions*
Flash exposure
compensation
E-TTL II flash
metering
Zoom*
[Built-in flash
settings]
Fixed to E-TTL II
[External flash func.
setting]
k
Page
k
k
234
234
k
k
k
k
124
k
k
231
k
* For [FEB] (Flash exposure bracketing), [Wireless functions] and [Zoom], refer
to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
233
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash mode
When using an external Speedlite, you can select the flash mode to
suit your desired flash shooting.
[E-TTL II] is the standard mode of
EX-series Speedlites for automatic
flash shooting.
[Manual flash] is for advanced users
who want to set the [Flash output]
(1/128 to 1/1 ) themselves.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to
the instruction manual of an external
Speedlite compatible with the
functions.
Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that the flash fires immediately
after the exposure starts.
If [2nd curtain] is set, the flash will fire right before the shutter
closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can
create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night. With E-TTL
II (autoflash exposure), two flashes will be fired: Once when you
press the shutter button completely, and once immediately before
the exposure ends. Also, with shutter speeds faster than 1/30 sec.,
1st curtain synchronization will automatically take effect.
If an external Speedlite is attached, you can also select [Hi-speed]
(e). For details, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Flash exposure compensation
See “Flash Exposure Compensation” on page 124.
234
3 Setting the FlashN
Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions
The Custom Functions displayed under [External flash C.Fn setting]
will vary depending on the Speedlite model.
1
Display the Custom Function.
With the camera ready to shoot with
an external Speedlite, select
[External flash C.Fn setting], then
press <0>.
the Custom Function.
2 SetPress
the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the function number, then set the
function. The procedure is the same
as setting the camera’s Custom
Functions (p.298).
Clearing the Settings
1
Select [Clear settings].
Under the [z2: Flash control] tab,
select [Clear settings], then press
<0>.
the settings to be cleared.
2 Select
Select [Clear built-in flash set.],
[Clear external flash set.], or [Clear
ext. flash C.Fn set.], then press
<0>.
When you select [OK], the respective
flash settings will be cleared.
235
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self
Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this
operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning at any
time, or disable it.
Cleaning the Sensor Now
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
[Clean nowf].
2 Select
Select [Clean nowf], then press
<0>.
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X The screen will indicate that the
sensor is being cleaned. (A small
sound may be heard.) Although there
will be a shutter sound during the
cleaning, no picture is taken.
For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed
upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.
Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option will remain disabled temporarily.
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
X The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the
power switch to <1> or <2>.
236
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for
erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital
Photo Professional (provided software, p.365) to erase the dust spots
automatically.
Preparation
Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to infinity
(∞). If the lens has no distance scale, look at the front of the lens and
turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
Obtaining the Dust Delete Data
1
Select [Dust Delete Data].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
Select [OK] and press <0>. After
the automatic self-cleaning of the
sensor is performed, a message will
appear. Although there will be a
shutter sound during the cleaning, no
picture is taken.
237
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
a solid-white object.
3 Shoot
At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.
- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a
patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
X The picture will be taken in aperturepriority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
X When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a message will appear.
Select [OK], and the menu will
reappear.
If the data was not obtained
successfully, an error message will
appear. Follow the “Preparation”
procedure on the preceding page, then
select [OK]. Take the picture again.
Dust Delete Data
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended to update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (provided software,
p.365) to erase dust spots, refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual (p.361).
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the
paper has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the provided software.
238
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before
cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. If the
sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon
Service Center is recommended.
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
[Clean manually].
2 Select
Select [Clean manually], then press
<0>.
[OK].
3 Select
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X In a moment, the reflex mirror will
lockup and the shutter will open.
4 Clean the sensor.
5 EndSetthethecleaning.
power switch to <2>.
If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged.
For the power source, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E15 (sold separately) is
recommended.
239
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and
image sensor may get damaged.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Opening the card slot/battery compartment cover.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror may get damaged.
Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force
can damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor and
scratch it.
If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
240
8
Image Playback
This chapter explains functions related to viewing
photos and movies, with more detail than in Chapter 2
“Basic Shooting and Image Playback”. Here you will
find explanations of how to play back and erase photos
and movies with the camera and view them on a TV set.
Images shot and saved with another device
The camera may not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their
file names changed.
241
x Searching for Images Quickly
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)
Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or
100 images on one screen.
1
Play back the image.
When you press the <x> button, the
last image captured will be displayed.
to the index display.
2 Switch
Press the <Hy> button.
X The 4-image index display will
appear. The selected image is
highlighted in an orange frame.
Pressing the <Hy> button will
switch the display from 9 images to
36 images and then to 100 images.
Pressing the <u> button will switch
the display from 100 images to 36
images to 9 images to 4 images and
then to 1 image.
Î
Î
Î
Î
an image.
3 Select
Press the <S> cross keys to move
the orange frame to select an image.
Turning the <6> dial will display
image(s) on the next or previous
screen.
Press <0> in the index display to
display the selected image as a
single image.
242
x Searching for Images Quickly
I
Jump through Images (Jump Display)
In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through
the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1
Select [Image jump w/6].
Under the [x2] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.
the jump method.
2 Select
Press the <S> cross keys to select
the jump method, then press <0>.
d: Display images one by one
e: Jump 10 images
f: Jump 100 images
g: Display by date
h: Display by folder
i: Display movies only
j: Display stills only
k: Display by image rating (p.248)
Turn the <6> dial to select.
by jumping.
3 Browse
Press the <x> button to play back
Jump method
Playback position
images.
In the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
X You can browse images with the
method you have set.
To search images according to the shooting date, select [Date].
To search images according to folder, select [Folder].
If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or
[Stills] to display only one or the other.
If no images match the selected [Rating], you cannot browse through the
images with the <6> dial.
243
u/y Magnified View
You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD
monitor.
1
Magnify the image.
Press the <u> button during image
playback.
X The image will be magnified.
If you hold down the <u> button, the
image will be magnified until it
reaches the maximum magnification.
Press the <Hy> button to reduce
the magnification. If you hold down
the button, the magnification will be
reduced to the single-image display.
Magnified area position
around the image.
2 Scroll
Use the <S> cross keys to scroll
around the magnified image.
To exit magnified view, press the
<x> button and the single-image
display will reappear.
In magnified view, you can turn the <6> dial to view another image at
the same magnification.
The image cannot be magnified during the image review immediately
after shooting.
A movie cannot be magnified.
244
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your
fingers for playback operations. Press the <x> button to play back
images.
Browsing Images
Swipe with one finger.
With single-image display, touch the
LCD monitor with one finger. You
can browse to the next or previous
image by swiping your finger to the
left or right.
Swipe to the left to see the next
(newer) image or swipe to the right to
see the previous (older) image.
With index display, also touch the
LCD monitor with one finger. You can
browse to the next or previous screen
by swiping your finger up or down.
Swipe up to see the next (newer)
images or swipe down to see the
previous (older) images.
When you select an image, the
orange frame will appear. Tap the
image again to display it as a single
image.
Jumping through Images (Jump Display)
Swipe with two fingers.
Touch the LCD monitor with two fingers.
When you swipe two fingers to the left or
right, you can jump through images with
the method set in [Image jump w/6]
under the [x2] tab.
245
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
Reducing Image (Index Display)
Pinch two fingers.
Touch the screen with two fingers spread
apart, and pinch your fingers together on
the screen.
Each time you pinch your fingers, the
single-image display will change to
the index display.
When you select an image, the
orange frame will appear. Tap the
image again to display it as a single
image.
Magnifying Image
Spread two fingers apart.
Touch the screen with two fingers
together, then spread your fingers apart
on the screen.
As you spread your fingers, the
image will be magnified.
The image can be magnified up to
10x.
You can scroll around the image by
dragging your finger.
To reduce the image, pinch your
fingers together on the screen.
Tapping the [2] icon will return to the
single-image display.
Touch screen operations on the camera’s LCD monitor are also possible
while playing back images on a TV set connected to your camera (p.262,
265).
246
b Rotating the Image
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
1
Select [Rotate image].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Rotate
image], then press <0>.
an image.
2 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image to be rotated.
You can also select an image in the
index display (p.242).
the image.
3 Rotate
Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90° 9 270° 9 0°.
To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
To exit and return to the menu, press
the <M> button.
If you have set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.225) before taking
vertical shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
A movie cannot be rotated.
247
3 Setting Ratings
You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of five rating
marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating.
1
Select [Rating].
Under the [x2] tab, select [Rating],
then press <0>.
an image.
2 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
an image or movie to be rated.
You can display three images by
pressing the <Hy> button. To
return to the single-image display,
press the <u> button.
the image.
3 RatePress
the <W> <X> keys to select a
rating.
X The total number of images rated will
be counted for each rating.
To rate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
248
3 Setting Ratings
The total number of images with a given rating that can be displayed is up to
999. If there are more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be
displayed for that rating.
Taking Advantage of Ratings
With [x2: Image jump w/6], you can display only images with a
specific rating.
With [x2: Slide show], you can play back only images with a specific
rating.
With Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.365), you can
select only images with a specific rating (still photos only).
With Windows 8.1, Windows 8, or Windows 7 etc., you can see each
file’s rating as part of the file information display or in the provided image
viewer (still photos only).
249
Q Quick Control for Playback
During single-image display, you can press the <Q> button to set any
of the following: [ : Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating],
[U: Creative filters], [S: Resize] (JPEG images only), [N: Cropping],
[e: Image jump w/6].
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
1
Press the <Q> button.
During image playback, press the
<Q> button.
X The Quick Control options will
appear.
a function and set it.
2 Select
Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
function.
X The name and current setting of the
selected function are displayed at the
bottom of the screen.
Set it by pressing the <Y> <Z> keys
or turn the <6> dial.
For Creative filters, Resize, and
Cropping, press <0> and set the
function. For details, see page 274 for
Creative filters, page 277 for Resize,
and page 279 for Cropping.
To cancel, press the <M> button.
the setting.
3 ExitPress
the <Q> button to exit the
Quick Control screen.
250
Q Quick Control for Playback
To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [51: Auto rotate]
is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to
the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may be
limited.
251
k Enjoying Movies
You can play back movies in the following three ways:
Playback on a TV Set
(p.262, 265)
Use the stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) or HDMI cable HTC-100
(sold separately) to connect the camera
to a TV set. Then you can play back
captured movies and still photos on the
TV.
If you have a High-Definition TV set and
connect your camera with an HDMI
cable, you can watch Full High-Definition
(Full HD: 1920x1080) and HighDefinition (HD: 1280x720) movies with
higher image quality.
Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera
cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.
Even if you connect the camera to a hard disk recorder with a USB
cable, you cannot play or save movies and still photos.
If the playback device is not compatible with MOV files, the movie cannot
be played.
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor
(p.254-261)
You can play back movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit
out the movie’s first and last scenes, and
play back the still photos and movies on
the card in an automatic slide show.
A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played
back with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with EOS
Video Snapshot Task (p.206) can be played on the camera.
252
k Enjoying Movies
Playback and Editing with a Computer
(p.365)
The movie files recorded on the card can
be transferred to a computer and played
with ImageBrowser EX (provided
software).
To have the movie play back smoothly on a computer, use a highperformance computer. Regarding the computer hardware requirements
for ImageBrowser EX, refer to the PDF file ImageBrowser EX User
Guide.
If you want to use commercially-available software to play back or edit
the movies, be sure it is compatible with MOV files. For details on
commercially-available software, contact the software manufacturer.
The camera may not be able to play movies shot with another camera.
253
k Playing Movies
1
Play back the image.
Press the <x> button to display an
image.
a movie.
2 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a
movie.
In the single-image display, the
<
1> icon displayed on the upper
left of the screen indicates a movie. If
the movie is a video snapshot,
[
] will be displayed.
In the index display, perforations at
the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
from the index display, press
<0> to switch to the singleimage display.
the single-image display, press
3 In<W>.
X The movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
back the movie.
4 PlaySelect
[7] (Play), then press <0>.
Speaker
254
X The movie will start playing.
You can pause the movie playback by
pressing <0>.
You can adjust the sound volume by
turning the <6> dial even during
movie playback.
For more details on the playback
procedure, see the next page.
k Playing Movies
Movie Playback Panel
Operation
7 Play
Playback Description
Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.
Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the <Y> <Z> keys.
The slow-motion speed is indicated at the upper right of the screen.
5 First frame
Displays the movie’s first frame.
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is
3 Previous frame
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by6 Next frame
frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.
4 Last frame
Displays the movie’s last frame.
8 Slow motion
Background music* Plays back a movie with the selected background music (p.261).
X Edit
Displays the editing screen (p.256).
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.254) volume by
turning the <6> dial.
32
Pressing the <M> button returns to the single-image display.
* When background music is set, the movie’s sound will not be played.
9 Volume
Playback with the Touch Screen
Tap [7] at the center of the screen.
X The movie will start playing.
To display the movie playback panel,
tap [
1] or [
] on the upper
left of the screen.
If you tap the screen during movie
playback, the movie pauses and the
movie playback panel will appear.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E12, the continuous playback time
at room temperature (23°C/73°F) will be as follows: approx. 2 hr. 30 min.
If you connect the camera to a TV set to play a movie (p.262, 265), adjust the sound
volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not change the sound volume.)
If you took a still photo while you shot the movie, the still photo will be
displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.
255
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie (except video
snapshots) in approx. 1-sec. increments.
1
On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
X The editing screen will be displayed.
the part to be edited out.
2 Specify
Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
Press the <Y><Z> keys to see
another frame. Holding it down will
fast forward the frames.
After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion highlighted
in gray on the top of the screen is
what will remain.
the edited movie.
3 Check
Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the portion highlighted in gray.
To change the editing, go back to step
2.
To cancel the editing, press the
<M> button, select [OK] on the
confirmation screen, then press
<0>.
256
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
the edited movie.
4 Save
Select [W], then press <0>.
X The save screen will appear.
To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
On the confirmation screen, select
[OK], then press <0> to save the
edited movie and return to the movie
playback screen.
Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position
indicated by [ ] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the
movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.
If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.
257
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
1
Number of images to be played
Select [Slide show].
Under the [x2] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.
the images to be played.
2 Select
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the desired option, then press
<0>.
[All images]/[Movies]/[Stills]
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
one of the following: [jAll images]/
[kMovies]/[zStills]. Then press
<0>.
[Date]/[Folder]/[Rating]
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
one of the following: [iDate]/
[nFolder]/[9Rating].
When <zH> is highlighted,
press the <B> button.
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the option, then press <0>.
[Date]
258
[Folder]
[Rating]
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Item
Playback Description
jAll images
All the still photos and movies on the card will be played
back.
iDate
Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date
will be played back.
nFolder
Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played
back.
kMovies
Only the movies on the card will be played back.
zStills
Only the still photos on the card will be played back.
9Rating
Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will
be played back.
[Set up] as desired.
3 SetPress
the <W> <X> keys to select
[Set up], then press <0>.
Set the [Display time], [Repeat]
(repeated playback), [Transition
effect] (effect when changing
images), and [Background music]
for the still photos.
The background music selection
procedure is explained on page 261.
After selecting the settings, press the
<M> button.
[Display time]
[Repeat]
259
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
[Transition effect]
[Background music]
the slide show.
4 StartPress
the <W><X> keys to select
[Start], then press <0>.
X After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
slide show.
5 ExitTothe
exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the <M>
button.
To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume
the slide show. You can also pause the slide show by tapping the screen.
During auto playback, you can press the <B> button to change the
still photo display format (p.89).
During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
During auto playback or pause, you can press the <Y> <Z> keys to
view another image.
During auto playback, auto power off will not work.
The display time may vary depending on the image.
To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 262.
260
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Selecting the Background Music
1
Select [Background music].
Set [Background music] to [On],
then press <0>.
If the card has no background music,
you cannot perform step 2.
the background music.
2 Select
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the desired background music, then
press <0>. You can also select
multiple background music tracks.
background music.
3 PlayTo the
listen to a sample of the
background music, press the
<B> button.
Press the <W> <X> keys to play
another background music track. To
stop listening to the background
music, press the <B> button
again.
Adjust the sound volume by turning
the <6> dial.
To delete a background music track,
press the <W> <X> keys to select
the track, then press the <L> button.
At the time of purchase, you cannot select background music with the
camera. You must first use EOS Utility (provided software) to copy the
background music to the card. For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual.
261
Viewing Images on a TV Set
You can view still photos and movies on a TV set.
Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot
be adjusted with the camera.
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.
Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
Viewing on High-Definition (HD) TV Sets
(Connected with HDMI)
HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required.
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
the HDMI cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.
Connect the HDMI cable to the TV’s
HDMI IN port.
on the TV and switch the
3 Turn
TV’s video input to select the
connected port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
262
Viewing Images on a TV Set
the <x> button.
5 Press
X The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
The images will automatically be
displayed at the TV’s optimum
resolution.
By pressing the <B> button, you
can change the display format.
To play back movies, see page 254.
The images cannot be output at the same time from both the <D>
and <q> terminals.
Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Certain TVs may not be able to play back the captured images. In such a
case, use the stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) to
connect to the TV.
Using HDMI CEC TV Sets
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible
with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback
operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.
1
Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].
Under the [x2] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
263
Viewing Images on a TV Set
the camera to a TV set.
2 Connect
Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV.
X The TV’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera.
the camera’s <x> button.
3 Press
X An image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV’s
remote control to play back images.
an image.
4 Select
Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the / button to
select an image.
Still photo playback menu
Movie playback menu
: Return
: 9-image index
: Play movie
: Slide show
: Disp. shooting info
: Rotate
the remote control’s Enter
5 Press
button.
X The menu appears and you can perform
the playback operations shown on the left.
Press the / button to select the
desired option, then press the Enter
button. For a slide show, press the
remote control’s / button to select an
option, then press the Enter button.
If you select [Return] and press the
Enter button, the menu will disappear
and you can use the / button to
select an image.
Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For
details, refer to the TV set’s instruction manual.
Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not
operate properly. In such a case, disconnect the HDMI cable, set [x2:
Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable], and use the camera to control the
playback operation.
264
Viewing Images on a TV Set
Viewing on Non-HD TV Sets (Connected with AV Cable)
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) is required.
1
Connect the AV cable to the
camera.
With the plug’s <Canon> logo facing
the back of the camera, insert it into
the <q > terminal.
the AV cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.
(Red)
(White)
AUDIO
(Yellow)
VIDEO
Connect the AV cable to the TV’s
video IN terminal and audio IN
terminals.
on the TV and switch the
3 Turn
TV’s video input to select the
connected port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
the <x> button.
5 Press
X The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
To play back movies, see page 254.
Do not use any AV cable other than the Stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately). Images may not be displayed if you use a different
cable.
If the video system format does not match the TV’s, the images will not
be displayed properly. If this happens, switch to the proper video system
format with [52: Video system].
265
K Protecting Images
Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally.
3 Protecting a Single Image
1
Select [Protect images].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.
X The protect setting screen will
appear.
[Select images].
2 Select
Select [Select images], then press
<0>.
X An image will be displayed.
Image protect icon
the image.
3 Protect
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image to be protected, then press
<0>.
X When an image is protected, the
<K> icon will appear on the top of
the screen.
To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
To protect another image, repeat step
3.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
266
K Protecting Images
3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at one time.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [x1: Protect
images], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
If you format the card (p.48), the protected images will also be erased.
Movies can also be protected.
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
If you erase all the images (p.269), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images
all at once.
267
L Erasing Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or
erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.266) will not be erased.
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you
no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important
images from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing a
1+73 image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.
Erasing a Single Image
1 Play back the image to be erased.
the <L> button.
2 Press
X The Erase menu will appear at the
bottom of the screen.
3
Erase the image.
Select [Erase], then press <0>.
The image displayed will be erased.
3 Checkmarking <X> Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By appending checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can
erase multiple images at one time.
1
268
Select [Erase images].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.
L Erasing Images
[Select and erase images].
2 Select
Select [Select and erase images],
then press <0>.
X An image will be displayed.
To display the three-image display,
press the <Hy> button. To return to
the single-image display, press the
<u> button.
the images to be erased.
3 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image to be erased, then press
<0>.
X A checkmark <X> will be displayed
on the upper left of the screen.
To select other images to be erased,
repeat step 3.
the image.
4 Erase
Press the <L> button.
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X The selected images will be erased.
3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at one time. When
[x1: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
To also erase protected images, format the card (p.48).
269
B Shooting Information Display
Sample Still Photo Taken in a Creative Zone Mode
Protect images
Exposure compensation amount
Rating
Flash exposure
compensation amount
Folder number - File number
Aperture
Histogram
(Brightness/RGB)
Shutter speed
Picture Style/Settings
Metering mode
Shooting mode
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
White balance
Color space
Shooting date and time
Image-recording
quality
Playback number/
Total images
recorded
White balance correction
File size
Eye-Fi transfer
* With 1+73 images, the 1 file size is displayed.
* For still photos taken during movie shooting, <G> will be displayed.
* If a Creative filter or Resize has been applied to the image, the <1+> icon will
change to <u>.
* If Cropping has been applied to the image, the <1+> icon will change to
<u> and the <73> icon will change to <N>.
* Images taken with flash without any flash exposure compensation are marked
with the < > icon. Images taken with flash exposure compensation are marked
with the <y> icon.
270
B Shooting Information Display
Sample Still Photo Taken in a Basic Zone Mode
Ambience and ambience
effects
Shooting mode
Lighting or scene
* With images taken in a Basic Zone mode, the information displayed will differ
depending on the shooting mode.
Sample Movie
Shooting time
Playback
Shutter speed
Aperture
Shooting mode
Movie recording
size
Movie file size
Frame rate
* If manual exposure was used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed
(when set manually) will be displayed.
* The < > icon will be displayed for video snapshots.
271
B Shooting Information Display
Highlight Alert
When the shooting information is displayed, any overexposed areas of the
image will blink. To obtain more image detail in the overexposed areas, set
the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again.
Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall
brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color saturation and
gradation. The display can be switched with [x2: Histogram disp].
[Brightness] Display
Sample Histograms
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of
the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis
indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and
Dark image
brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates
how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The
more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the
image. The more pixels there are toward the right,
Normal brightness
the brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on
the left, the shadow detail will be lost. If there are too
many pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be
Bright image
lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By
checking the image and its brightness histogram, you
can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.
[RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color’s
brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The horizontal
axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left and brighter
on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for
each color brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the
darker and less prominent the color. The more pixels there are toward the
right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the
left, the respective color information will be lacking. If there are too many
pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no gradation. By
checking the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation
and gradation condition, as well as white balance inclination.
272
9
Post-Processing
Images
After taking a picture, you can apply a Creative filter,
resize the image (reduce the number of pixels), or crop
the image.
The camera may not be able to process images taken with
another camera.
Post-processing images as described in this chapter is not
possible while the camera is connected to a computer via the
<C> terminal.
273
U Applying Creative Filters
You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a
new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect.
1
Select [Creative filters].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Creative
filters], then press <0>.
X An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
Select the image you want to apply a
filter to.
By pressing the <Hy> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
a filter.
3 Select
When you press <0>, the types of
Creative filters will be displayed
(p.275).
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a
Creative filter, then press <0>.
X The image will be displayed with the
corresponding filter applied.
the filter effect.
4 Adjust
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust
the filter effect, then press <0>.
For the Miniature effect, press the
<W> <X> keys and select the image
area (within the white frame) where
you want the image to look sharp,
then press <0>.
274
U Applying Creative Filters
the image.
5 Save
Select [OK] to save the image.
Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
To apply filters to another image,
repeat steps 2 to 5.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
When shooting 1+73 or 1 images, the Creative filter will be
applied to the 1 image and the image will be saved as a JPEG image.
If an aspect ratio was set for a 1 image and a Creative filter is applied
to it, the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that was set.
Creative Filter Characteristics
Grainy B/W
Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the blackand-white effect by adjusting the contrast.
Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness
by adjusting the blur.
Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter effect will
magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Set the filter
effect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.
275
U Applying Creative Filters
Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look threedimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note that
the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendered with a
smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.
Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can adjust the color density. Note that night scenes or dark scenes
may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular
or have significant noise.
Toy camera effect
Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a color tone that makes it
look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the color cast
by adjusting the color tone.
Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks
sharp. In step 4 on page 274 , if you press the <B> button (or
tap on [z ] at the screen’s bottom), you can switch between
the white frame’s vertical and horizontal orientations.
276
S Resizing JPEG Images
You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a
new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/4/a/b
images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.
1
Select [Resize].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Resize],
then press <0>.
X An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
Select the image you want to resize.
By pressing the <Hy> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
the desired image size.
3 Select
Press <0> to display the image
sizes.
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the desired image size, then press
<0>.
Target sizes
the image.
4 Save
Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
277
S Resizing JPEG Images
Resize Options According to Original Image Size
Available Resize Settings
Original Image
Size
4
a
b
3
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
4
k
a
c
k
k
b
c
Image Sizes
The image size displayed in step 3 on the preceding page, such as
[***M ****x****], has a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image size according to
aspect ratios is shown in the table below.
The asterisked image-recording quality figures do not exactly match the
aspect ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.
Image
Quality
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
4
3456x2304
3072x2304
3456x1944
2304x2304
(8.0 megapixels) (7.0 megapixels) (6.7 megapixels) (5.3 megapixels)
a
2592x1728
2304x1728
2592x1456*
1728x1728
(4.5 megapixels) (4.0 megapixels) (3.8 megapixels) (3.0 megapixels)
b
1920x1280
1696x1280*
1920x1080
1280x1280
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
c
720x480
640x480
720x400*
480x480
(350,000 pixels) (310,000 pixels) (290,000 pixels) (230,000 pixels)
278
N Cropping JPEG Images
You can crop the image as desired and save it as a new image. JPEG
c and RAW images cannot be cropped. The 1+73 image’s
JPEG image can be cropped.
1
Select [Cropping].
Under the [x2] tab, select
[Cropping], then press <0>.
X An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
Select the image you want to crop.
By pressing the <Hy> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
the cropping frame’s size,
3 Set
aspect ratio, position, and
orientation.
Press <0> to display the cropping
frame.
X Everything outside the cropping
frame will be removed.
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Press the <u> or <Hy> button.
X The cropping frame size will change. The smaller the cropping
frame, the larger the image magnification will be.
Changing the Cropping Frame Aspect Ratio
Turn the <6> dial.
X Cropping frame aspect ratio will change to [3:2], [16:9], [4:3], or
[1:1].
279
N Cropping JPEG Images
Moving the Cropping Frame
Press the <S> cross keys.
X The cropping frame will move up, down, left, or right.
You can also touch the cropping frame and drag it to the desired
position.
Rotating the Cropping Frame Orientation
Press the <B> button.
X The cropping frame will switch between the vertical and horizontal
orientations. This enables you to create a vertical image from a
horizontal one, and vice versa.
the cropped image in the
4 Display
full view.
Press the <O> button.
X You can see the cropped image.
To return to the original display, press
the <O> button again.
the image.
5 Save
Press <0> and select [OK] to save
the cropped image.
Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
To crop another image, repeat steps 2
to 4.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
You cannot crop an image that has been cropped.
You cannot apply a Creative filter or resizing to a cropped image.
280
10
Printing Images
Printing (p.282)
You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print
out the images on the card. The camera is compatible with
“wPictBridge”, which is the standard for direct printing.
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.291)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print
images recorded on the card according to your printing
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the
print order to a photofinisher.
Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.295)
You can specify images on the card for printing in a
photobook.
281
Preparing to Print
The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the
camera while you look at the camera’s LCD monitor.
Connecting the Camera to a Printer
1
Set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
the printer.
2 SetForupdetails,
refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
the Camera to the
3 Connect
Printer.
Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
Connect the cable to the camera’s
<C> terminal with the cable
plug’s <D> icon facing the front of
the camera.
To connect to the printer, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
4 Turn on the printer.
the camera’s power switch to
5 Set
<1>.
X Some printers may make a beeping
sound.
282
Preparing to Print
wPictBridge
back the image.
6 PlayPress
the <x> button.
X The image will appear, with the <w>
icon on the upper left of the screen to
indicate that the camera is connected
to a printer.
Before using the printer, make sure it has a PictBridge connection port.
Movies cannot be printed.
The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct
or Bubble Jet Direct.
Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.
If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the
printer. Resolve the problem displayed in the error message (p.290).
Printing is not possible when shooting mode is set to <F> or <G> in the
<8> mode, or when Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set.
You can also print RAW images taken with this camera.
If you use a battery pack to power the camera, make sure it is fully
charged. With a fully-charged battery pack, you can print for approx. 3 hr.
20 min.
Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold
the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.
For direct printing, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E15 (sold separately) to
power the camera is recommended.
283
w Printing
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the
printer. Some settings may not be available. For details, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
Printer-connected icon
1
Select the image to be printed.
Check that the <w> icon is
displayed on the upper left of the LCD
monitor.
Press the <Y><Z> keys to select
the image to be printed.
<0>.
2 Press
X The print setting screen will appear.
Print setting screen
Sets the printing effects (p.286).
Sets the date or file number imprinting to on or
off.
Sets the quantity to be printed.
Sets the print area (p.289).
Sets the paper size, type, and layout.
Returns to the screen in step 1.
Starts the printing.
The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file
number imprinting and cropping may not be selectable.
[Paper settings].
3 Select
Select [Paper settings], then press
<0>.
X The paper settings screen will
appear.
284
w Printing
Q Setting the Paper Size
Select the size of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
X The paper type screen will appear.
Y Setting the Paper Type
Select the type of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
X The page layout screen will appear.
U Setting the Page Layout
Select the page layout, then press
<0>.
X The print setting screen will reappear.
Bordered
The print will have white borders along the edges.
Borderless
The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print
borderless prints, the print will have borders.
Borderedc
The shooting information*1 will be imprinted on the border on
9x13 cm or larger prints.
xx-up
Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.
20-upc
35-upp
Default
20 or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper*2.
• [20-upc] will have the shooting information*1 imprinted.
The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings.
*1: From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter
speed, aperture, exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance,
etc., will be imprinted.
*2: After ordering the prints with “Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)” (p.291), printing
by following “Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images” (p.294) is recommended.
If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio, the image
may be cropped significantly when you print it as a borderless print. If the image is
cropped, it may look grainier on the paper due to the fewer number of pixels.
285
w Printing
the printing effects (image
4 Set
optimization).
Set them if necessary. If you do not
need to set any printing effects, go to
step 5.
What is displayed on the screen
differs depending on the printer.
Select the option, then press <0>.
Select the desired printing effect, then
press <0>.
If the <e> icon is displayed brightly
next to <z>, you can also adjust
the printing effect (p.288).
Printing Effect
Description
EOn
The image will be printed using the printer’s standard colors.
The image’s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections.
EOff
No automatic correction will be applied.
EVivid
The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce
more vivid blues and greens.
ENR
Image noise is reduced before printing.
0 B/W
Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.
0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.
0 Warm tone Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.
zNatural
Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No automatic
color adjustments are applied.
zNatural M
The printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural”
setting. However, this setting enables finer printing adjustments
than with “Natural”.
EDefault
The printing will differ depending on the printer. For details,
refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
* When you change the printing effects, changes are reflected in the image
displayed on the upper left of the screen. Note that the printed image may
look slightly different from the displayed image, which is only an
approximation. This also applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on
page 288.
286
w Printing
the date and file number
5 Set
imprinting.
Set them if necessary.
Select <I>, then press <0>.
Set the print settings as desired, then
press <0>.
of copies.
6 SetSettheit ifnumber
necessary.
Select <R>, then press <0>.
Set the number of copies, then press
<0>.
printing.
7 StartSelect
[Print], then press <0>.
The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the
printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer
to the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings
are.
Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may
take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].
If image tilt correction (p.289) is applied, it may take longer to print the
image.
To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select
[OK].
If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.227), all the settings will
revert to their defaults.
287
w Printing
e Adjustment of Printing Effects
In step 4 on page 286, select the printing
effect. When the <e> icon is displayed
brightly next to <z>, you can press
the <B> button. You can then adjust
the printing effect. What can be adjusted
or what is displayed will depend on the
selection made in step 4.
Brightness
The image brightness can be adjusted.
Adjust levels
When you select [Manual], you can change the
histogram’s distribution and adjust the image’s
brightness and contrast.
With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press the
<B> button to change the position of the <h>.
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to freely adjust the
shadow level (0-127) or highlight level (128-255).
kBrightener
Effective in backlit conditions that can make the subject’s face look
dark. When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.
Red-eye corr.
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. When [On]
is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.
The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not be reflected on
the screen.
When [Detail set.] is selected, you can adjust the [Contrast], [Saturation],
[Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color balance], use the
<S> cross keys. B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for green.
The image’s color balance will be corrected towards the selected color.
If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to
their defaults.
288
w Printing
Cropping the Image
Tilt correction
You can crop the image and print only an
enlarged version of the cropped portion,
as if the image had been recomposed.
Set the cropping right before printing.
If you change the print settings after
setting the cropping, you may have to set
the cropping again before printing.
1 On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].
2 Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The
cropping frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [Paper settings].
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
When you press the <u> or <Hy> button, the size of the
cropping frame will change. The smaller the cropping frame, the
larger the image magnification will be for printing.
Moving the Cropping Frame
Press the <S> cross keys to move the frame over the image vertically or
horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area.
Rotating the Frame
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the cropping frame
between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you
to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image.
Image Tilt Correction
By turning the <6> dial, you can adjust the image tilt angle up to
±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the
image tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.
3 Press <0> to exit the cropping.
XThe print setting screen will reappear.
You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the
print setting screen.
289
w Printing
Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as
you specified.
The smaller you make the cropping frame, the grainier the picture will
look in the print.
While cropping the image, look at the camera’s LCD monitor. If you look
at the image on a TV screen, the cropping frame may not be displayed
accurately.
Handling Printer Errors
If you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.) and select [Continue] to
resume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to
resume printing. For details on resuming the printing, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
Error Messages
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the
camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop printing. After fixing the
problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer
to the printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.
Ink Error
Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a
different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable.
290
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file number imprinting.
The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They
cannot be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Options
1
Select [Print order].
Under the [x1] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.
[Set up].
2 Select
Select [Set up], then press <0>.
as desired.
3 SetSetthetheoption
[Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting,
then press <0>.
[Print type]
[Date]
[File No.]
291
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print type
Date
File number
K
Standard
Prints one image on one sheet.
L
Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on
one sheet.
K
L
Both
Prints both the standard and index prints.
On
Off
On
Off
[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.
[On] imprints the file number on the print.
the setting.
4 ExitPress
the <7> button.
X The print order screen will reappear.
Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or
[All image] to order the images to be
printed.
Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.
With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
When printing with DPOF, use the card whose print order specifications
have been set. It will not work if you just extract images from the card
and try to print them.
Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to
print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction
manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a
different camera and then try to specify a print order. The print order may
be overwritten. Also, depending on the image type, the print order may
not be possible.
RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print RAW
images with PictBridge (p.282).
292
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print Ordering
Sel.Image
Select and order images one by one.
To display the three-image display, press
the <Hy> button. To return to the
single-image display, press the <u>
button.
Press the <M> button to save the
print order to the card.
Quantity
Total images selected
Checkmark
Index icon
[Standard] [Both]
Press the <W> <X> keys to set the
number of copies to be printed for the
displayed image.
[Index]
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box <X>. The image will be included in
the index print.
Byn
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be placed. If you select [Clear
all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for that folder will
all be canceled.
All image
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print
order will be cleared for all the images on the card.
Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order
even if you set [Byn] or [All image].
When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one
print order. If you specify more than this, all the images may not be
printed.
293
W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images
With a PictBridge printer, you can easily
print images with DPOF.
1
Prepare to print.
See page 282.
Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer” procedure up to step 5.
2 Under the [x1] tab, select [Print order].
3 Select [Print].
[Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a
printer and printing is possible.
4 Set the [Paper settings] (p.284).
Set the printing effects (p.286) if necessary.
5 Select [OK].
Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
Certain printers cannot imprint the file number.
If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a
bright background or on the border.
Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.
If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining images,
select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if any of the following occur:
• Before resuming the printing, you changed the print order or deleted
print-ordered images.
• When you set the index, you changed the paper setting before
resuming the printing.
• When you paused the printing, the card’s remaining capacity was low.
If a problem occurs during printing, see page 290.
294
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
When you select images to use in photobooks (up to 998 images) and
use EOS Utility (provided software) to transfer them to a computer, the
selected images will be copied into a dedicated folder. This function is
useful for ordering photobooks online and for printing photobooks on a
printer.
Specifying One Image at a Time
1
Select [Photobook Set-up].
Under the [x1] tab, select
[Photobook Set-up], then press
<0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
Select [Select images], then press
<0>.
X An image will be displayed.
To display the three-image display,
press the <Hy> button. To return to
the single-image display, press the
<u> button.
the image to be specified.
3 Select
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the image to be specified, then press
<0>.
Repeat this step to select other
images. The number of images that
have been specified will be displayed
on the upper left of the screen.
To cancel the image specification,
press <0> again.
To return to the menu, press the
<M> button.
295
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at one time.
When [x1: Photobook Set-up] is set
to [All images in folder] or [All images
on card], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be specified.
To cancel the image specification, select
[Clear all in folder] or [Clear all on
card].
Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another camera
for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings may be
overwritten.
RAW images and movies cannot be specified.
296
11
Customizing the
Camera
Cre
ati
v
You can customize various camera functions to suit
your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions.
Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative
Zone modes.
e
ne
Zo
297
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
1
Custom Function number
Select [Custom Functions (C.Fn)].
Under the [54] tab, select [Custom
Functions (C.Fn)], then press
<0>.
the Custom Function
2 Select
number.
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the Custom Function number, then
press <0>.
the setting as desired.
3 Change
Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the desired setting (number), then
press <0>.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to
set other Custom Functions.
At the bottom of the screen, the
current Custom Function settings are
indicated below the respective
function numbers.
the setting.
4 ExitPress
the <M> button.
X The screen for step 1 will reappear.
Clearing All Custom Functions
Under [54: Clear settings], select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to
clear all the Custom Function settings (p.227).
298
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Custom Functions
C.Fn I: Exposure
1
Exposure level increments
2
ISO expansion
A LV
Shooting
kMovie
Shooting
k
k
k
In a
p.301
k
k
p.302
k (With
f*)
p.300
C.Fn II: Image
3
Highlight tone priority
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive
4
AF-assist beam firing
5
Mirror lockup
* If you use an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light,
the LED light will turn on for AF-assist even in the c, o, and d modes.
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others
6
Shutter/AE lock button
7
Assign SET button
8
LCD display when power ON
p.303
k
k
p.304
k
(Except 3)
k
(Except 2, 3)*
* [5: ISO speed] is settable only for manual exposure shooting.
The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV)
shooting or movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)
299
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Custom Functions are organized into four groups based on the function
type: C.Fn I: Exposure, C.Fn II: Image, C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive, C.Fn
IV: Operation/Others.
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn-1
Exposure level increments
0: 1/3-stop
1: 1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is
effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine
increments than 1/3-stop increments.
With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on
the LCD monitor as shown below.
C.Fn-2
ISO expansion
0: Off
1: On
When you set the ISO speed, you will be able to set “H”
(equivalent to ISO 25600) for still photos and “H” (equivalent to
ISO 12800) for movies. Note that if [C.Fn-3: Highlight tone
priority] is set to [1: Enable], “H” cannot be set.
300
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II: Image
C.Fn-3
Highlight tone priority
0: Disable
1: Enable
Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from
the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between
the grays and highlights becomes smoother.
With setting 1, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.130) is automatically set to
[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed.
With setting 1, noise (grainy image, banding, etc.) may become slightly
more pronounced than with setting 0.
With setting 1, the settable range will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800 (up to ISO
6400 for movies).
Also, the <A> icon will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder when highlight tone priority is enabled.
301
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive
C.Fn-4
AF-assist beam firing
Enables or disables the built-in flash’s AF-assist beam or the EOSdedicated external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.
0: Enable
The AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary.
1: Disable
The AF-assist beam is not emitted. This prevents the AF-assist
beam from disturbing others.
2: Enable external flash only
If an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam
when necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AFassist beam.
3: IR AF assist beam only
When an external Speedlite is attached, only with infrared AFassist beam will be emitted. This prevents the AF-assist beam
from firing as a burst of small flashes.
With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED
light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.
If the external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set
to [Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist
beam will not be emitted.
C.Fn-5
Mirror lockup
0: Disable
1: Enable
Prevents mechanical vibrations in the camera caused by the reflex
mirror action (mirror shock), which can disturb shooting with super
telephoto lenses or close-up (macro) shooting. See page 147 for
the mirror lockup procedure.
302
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others
C.Fn-6
Shutter/AE lock button
0: AF/AE lock
1: AE lock/AF
This is convenient when you want to focus and meter separately.
Press the <A> button to autofocus, and press the shutter button
halfway to apply AE lock.
2: AF/AF lock, no AE lock
In the AI Servo AF operation, you can press the <A> button to
pause the AF operation momentarily. This prevents the AF from
being thrown off by any obstacle passing between the camera and
subject. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
3: AE/AF, no AE lock
This is useful for subjects that keep moving and stopping
repeatedly. During AI Servo AF, you can press the <A> button to
start or stop the AI Servo AF operation. The exposure is set at the
moment the picture is taken. Thus, the optimum focusing and
exposure will always be achieved as you wait for the decisive
moment.
During Live View shooting or movie shooting
With setting 1 or 3, press the <A> button for One-Shot AF. Also, using
the touch shutter will take a picture without autofocusing.
With setting 2, press the shutter button halfway for One-Shot AF.
303
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn-7
Assign SET button
You can assign a frequently-used function to <Q/0>. When the
camera is ready to shoot, pressing the <Q/0> button will display
the respective function setting screen.
0: Quick Control screen
The Quick Control screen will appear.
1: Image quality
The Image quality setting screen will appear. Select the desired
image-recording quality, then press <Q/0>.
2: Flash exposure compensation
The Flash exposure compensation setting screen will appear. Set
the flash exposure compensation, then press <Q/0>.
3: LCD monitor On/Off
You can turn on or off the LCD monitor.
4: Menu display
The menu screen will appear.
5: ISO speed
The ISO speed setting screen will appear. Set the ISO speed with
the <Y> <Z> keys or <6> dial. You can also set the ISO speed
looking through the viewfinder.
C.Fn-8
LCD display when power ON
0: Display on
When the power switch is turned on, the shooting settings will be
displayed (p.50).
1: Previous display status
If you pressed the <B> button and turned off the camera while
the LCD monitor was off, the shooting settings will not be
displayed when you turn on the camera again. This helps to save
battery power. The menu screens and image playback will still be
displayed when used.
If you pressed the <B> button to display the shooting settings
and then turn off the camera, the shooting settings will be
displayed when you turn on the camera again.
304
3 Registering My MenuN
Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and
Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently.
1
Select [My Menu settings].
Under the [9] tab, select [My Menu
settings], then press <0>.
[Register to My Menu].
2 Select
Select [Register to My Menu], then
press <0>.
the desired items.
3 Register
Select the item, then press <0>.
On the confirmation dialog, select [OK]
and press <0> to register the item.
You can register up to six items.
To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
My Menu Settings
Sort
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then
press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <W> <X> keys to
change the order, then press <0>.
Delete item/items and Delete all items
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete item/items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items] deletes all
registered items.
Display from My Menu
When [Enable] is set, the [9] tab will be displayed first when you
display the menu screen.
305
12
Reference
This chapter provides reference information for camera
features, system accessories, etc.
Certification Logo
Under the [54] tab, if you select [Certification Logo Display]
and press <0>, some of the logos of the camera’s certifications
will appear. Other certification logos can be found in this
Instruction Manual, on the camera body, and on the camera’s
package.
307
Using a Household Power Outlet
With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E15 (sold separately), you can connect the
camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining
battery level.
1
Connect the power cord.
Connect the power cord as shown in
the illustration.
After using the camera, unplug the
power plug from the power outlet.
the DC Coupler.
2 Connect
Connect the DC cord’s plug to the DC
Coupler.
the DC Coupler.
3 Insert
Open the cover and insert the DC
Coupler until it locks in place.
in the DC cord.
4 Push
Open the DC cord hole cover and
install the cord as shown.
Close the cover.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord while the camera’s power
switch is set to <1>.
308
Remote Control Shooting
Remote Controller RC-6 (Sold Separately)
This remote controller enables you to take pictures wirelessly up to
approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. You can either shoot
immediately or use a 2-sec. delay.
Remote control sensor
Set the self-timer to <Q> (p.110).
Point the remote controller toward the camera’s remote control
sensor and press the transmit button.
X The camera will autofocus.
X When focus is achieved, the self-timer lamp will light up and the
picture will be taken.
Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by
triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from
such light sources.
If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and
operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter
inadvertently.
Remote Controller RC-1/RC-5 (sold separately) can also be used.
Remote control shooting is also possible with an EX-series Speedlite
equipped with a remote-release function.
The Remote Controller can also be used during movie shooting (p.181).
Remote Controller RC-5 cannot be used to take still photos in the movie
shooting mode.
309
Remote Control Shooting
F Remote Switch RS-60E3 (Sold Separately)
Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) comes with an approx. 60
cm/2.0 ft cord. When connected to the camera’s remote control
terminal, it can be pressed halfway and completely, just like the shutter
button.
Using the Eyepiece Cover
When you use the self-timer, bulb, or Remote Switch and do not look
through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the
image to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.29)
attached to the camera strap.
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the
eyepiece cover is unnecessary.
1
Detach the eyecup.
Push the bottom of the eyecup to
detach.
the eyepiece cover.
2 Attach
Slide the eyepiece cover down into
the eyepiece groove to attach it.
After taking the picture, detach the
eyepiece cover and attach the
eyecup by sliding it down into the
eyepiece groove.
310
External Speedlites
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
Basically operates like a built-in flash for easy operation.
When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is attached to the
camera, almost all the autoflash control is done by the camera. In other
words, it is like a high-output flash attached externally in place of the
built-in flash.
For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EX-series Speedlites.
Shoe-mount Speedlites
Macro Lites
With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings
(p.233), only [Flash exposure compensation] can be set for [External
flash func. setting]. ([Shutter synchronization] can also be set with
certain EX-series Speedlites.)
If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, the
flash exposure compensation icon displayed on the camera’s LCD
monitor will change from y to 0.
If the external Speedlite’s Custom Function has the flash metering mode
set to TTL autoflash, the flash will fire at full output only.
311
External Speedlites
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series
With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set in TTL or A-TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.
Using Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with compact, non-Canon flash units at
1/200 sec. or slower shutter speeds.
Use a sync speed slower than 1/200 sec.
Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it synchronizes
properly with the camera.
Cautions for Live View Shooting
A non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting.
If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and
malfunction may result.
Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not fire.
312
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can
automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to
an online service via a wireless LAN.
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or
contact the card manufacturer.
The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions
(including wireless transfer). In case of an issue with an Eye-Fi
card, please check with the card manufacturer. Also note that
approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries or
regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted. If it
is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in your
area, please check with the card manufacturer.
1 Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.32).
[Eye-Fi settings].
2 Select
Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi
settings], then press <0>.
This menu is displayed only when an
Eye-Fi card is inserted into the
camera.
Eye-Fi transmission.
3 Enable
Select [Eye-Fi trans.], then press
<0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
If you set [Disable], automatic
transmission will not occur even with
the Eye-Fi card inserted
(transmission status icon I).
the connection information.
4 Display
Select [Connection info.], then press
<0>.
313
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
the [Access point SSID:].
5 Check
Check that an access point is
displayed for [Access point SSID:].
You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s
MAC address and firmware version.
Press the <M> button three times
to exit the menu.
the picture.
6 Take
X The picture is transferred and the
Transmission status icon
<H> icon switches from gray (not
connected) to one of the icons below.
For transferred images, O is
displayed in the shooting information
display (p.270).
H(Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.
H(Blinking) Connecting... : Connecting to access point.
H(Displayed) Connected : Connection to access point established.
H() Transferring...
: Image transfer to access point in progress.
314
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards
If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card
information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.
Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In
hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.
If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and
computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction manual.
Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image
transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.
Because of the transmission function, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.
The battery power will be consumed faster.
During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.
If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [Eye-Fi
settings] will not appear on the menu. Also, the transmission status icon
<H> will not appear on the LCD monitor.
315
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting in Basic Zone Modes
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
All image quality settings
selectable
Automatically set/
ISO Auto
ISO speed Manual
A 7 C 2 3 4 5
: Not selectable/Disabled
8
C P x 6
F
G
k k k k k k k k k k k k*
1
o o o o o o o o o o o
o
k*1
o
Maximum for Auto
Picture
Style
Automatically set/Auto D D D D D D D D D D D D
Extra Effect Shot
Ambience-based shots
Lighting/scene based shots
Background blur
Color tone
Creative filters*2
Auto
White
balance
D
Manual selection
k
k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k
k
k k
k k k k k k k k k
k
o o o o o o o o o o o o
o
Preset
Custom
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
o o o o o o o o o o o
Peripheral
Lens
illumination correction k k k k k k k k k k k
aberration
correction Chromatic aberration k k k k k k k k k k k
correction
o
o
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction o o o o o o o o o o o
Highlight tone priority
Color
space
sRGB
o o o o o o o o o o o
Adobe RGB
*1 :1+73 or 1 cannot be selected.
*2 : Settable only for Live View shooting.
316
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Function
A 7 C 2 3 4 5
One-Shot AF
o o o
AI Servo AF
Focusing
AI Focus AF
AF point selection
AF-assist beam
Evaluative metering
Metering
mode
8
C P x 6 F G
o o o o o
o o
o o o
o o o o o o o o o o o o o
o
o o
o *3 *3 o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o
o o o
Center-weighted
average metering
Metering mode
selection
Program shift
o
Exposure compensation
Exposure
AEB
AE lock
Depth-of-field preview
Single shooting
Drive/
self-timer
Silent continuous shooting
Q (10 sec.)
l (2 sec.)
q (Continuous)
Automatic firing
Manual firing
Built-in
flash
External
flash
k k k k k k k k k k k k k
Continuous shooting k k k k k k k k k k k k k
Silent single shooting
Flash off
Red-eye reduction
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k k k k
k k k k
k k k k
o o
k k
o k k o
k k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k k k k
k k k k
k k k k
o
k k
o k o o
k k
k k k
k k k
k k k
o
k
o o
k k
FE lock
Flash exposure
compensation
Function settings
Custom Function settings
Live View shooting
k k k k k k k k k
k k k
Aspect ratio*2
Quick Control
k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k
*3: If the AF method is Quick mode during Live View shooting, the external
Speedlite will emit the AF-assist beam when necessary.
Feature guide
317
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting in Creative Zone Modes
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
All image quality settings selectable
Automatically set/ISO Auto
ISO speed
Manual
Maximum for Auto
Picture Style
Automatically set/Auto
Manual selection
: Not selectable/Disabled
d
s
f
a
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Extra Effect Shot
Ambience-based shots
Lighting/scene based shots
Background blur
Color tone
Creative filters*1
Auto
White balance
Preset
Custom
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination
Lens aberration correction
correction
Chromatic aberration
correction
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
Highlight tone priority
Color space
sRGB
Adobe RGB
One-Shot AF
AI Servo AF
Focusing
AI Focus AF
AF point selection
AF-assist beam
*1 : Settable only for Live View shooting.
318
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Function
Evaluative metering
Metering mode Metering mode
selection
d
s
f
a
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Program shift
k
Exposure
compensation
k
k
k
AEB
k
k
k
k
AE lock
k
k
k
*2
Depth-of-field
preview
k
k
k
k
Single shooting
k
k
k
k
Continuous shooting
k
k
k
k
Silent single shooting*3
k
k
k
k
Silent continuous
shooting*3
k
k
k
k
Q (10 sec.)
k
k
k
k
l (2 sec.)
k
k
k
k
q (Continuous)
k
k
k
k
Manual firing
k
k
k
k
Flash off
k
k
k
k
Red-eye reduction
k
k
k
k
FE lock
k
k
k
k
Flash exposure
compensation
k
k
k
k
Function settings
k
k
k
k
External flash Custom Function
settings
k
k
k
k
Live View shooting
k
k
k
k
Aspect ratio*1
k
k
k
k
Quick Control
k
k
k
k
Feature guide
k
k
k
k
Exposure
Drive/
self-timer
Automatic firing
Built-in flash
*2 : With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
*3 : Settable only for viewfinder shooting.
319
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Movie Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
Still Photos
A 7 C 2 3 4 5 8 d sfa
z*1
y
All image quality settings
selectable (movie)
All image quality settings
selectable (still photos)
Video snapshot
ISO
speed
Picture
Style
k
My k M
k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k
Automatically set/
o o o o o o o o o o o k o o k
ISO Auto
Manual
k
Manual selection
k k k k
Preset
k k k k
k k
Custom
k k k k
k k
Correction
k k k k
k k
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral
illumination
Lens
correction
aberration
correction Chromatic
aberration
correction
Long exposure noise
reduction
High ISO speed noise
reduction
Highlight tone priority
k k
sRGB
o o o o o o o o k k k k o k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k
k k
o o o o o o o o o o o o o k k
Adobe RGB
*1: The z icon indicates still photo shooting during movie shooting.
320
k k
o o o o o o o o k k k k o k k
Bracketing
Color
space
k
Automatically set/
o o o o o o o o k k k k o k k
Auto
Auto
White
balance
: Not selectable/Disabled
Movies
k k
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Movies
Function
Still Photos
A 7 C 2 3 4 5 8 d sfa
y
k
z*1
My k M
Face+Tracking
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
FlexiZone - Multi
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
Focusing FlexiZone - Single k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
Manual focus
(MF)
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
Metering mode
Program shift
AE lock
Exposure
Exposure compensation
k k k *2
k
k k k
k
*2
AEB
Depth-of-field
preview
k k k
Single shooting
Continuous
shooting*3
Silent single
shooting
Drive/
self-timer Silent continuous
shooting
k k k
Q (10 sec.)*3
k k k
l (2 sec.)*3
k k k
q (Continuous)*3
k k k
Built-in flash
Aspect ratio
Sound recording
k k k k k k k k k k k k
Quick Control
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
*2: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
*3: Works only before you start shooting a movie.
321
System Map
ST-E2 ST-E3-RT 90EX 270EX II
Eyepiece Extender
EP-EX15ll
Rubber Frame Ef
320EX
430EX II 600EX-RT/ Macro Ring Lite Macro Twin Lite
600EX
MR-14EX II
MT-24EX
Bundled
Accessories
Eyecup Ef
E-series Dioptric
Adjustment Lenses
Wide Strap
Angle Finder C
Semi Hard Case
EH25-L
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-E15
Battery Pack
LP-E12
Hand Strap E2
Battery Charger
LC-E12 or LC-E12E
DC Coupler
DR-E15
Compact Power
Adapter
CA-PS700
322
System Map
GPS Receiver
GP-E2
Remote
Controller
RC-6
Remote Switch
RS-60E3
EF lenses
EF-S lenses
External microphone
HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)
TV/Video
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)
PictBridge-compatible printer
EOS Solution
Disk
Interface Cable
(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)
Interface Cable IFC-200U/500U
(1.9 m/6.2 ft.) / (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
USB port
SD/SDHC/SDXC
memory card
Card reader
Card slot
Computer
* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.
* When using GPS, be sure to check the countries and areas of use, and use the
device in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or region.
323
3 Menu Settings
Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
Shooting 1 (Red)
Page
Image quality
73/83/74/84/7a/8a/b/c/
1+73*1/1*1
94
Beep
Enable / Touch to
216
Drive/
self-timer
u/i/Q/l/q
108
B*2/M*2
110
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
216
Image review
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
217
Lens aberration
correction
Peripheral illumination correction: Enable / Disable
Chromatic aberration correction: Enable /
Disable
134
Red-eye reduction
Disable / Enable
112
/ Disable
*1: Not selectable in the <F> and <G> modes.
*2: Not settable during Live View shooting.
Shooting 2 (Red)
Exposure
compensation/AEB
1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops (AEB:
±2 stops)
125
Flash control
Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.
speed in Av mode / Built-in flash settings /
External flash function settings / External flash
C.Fn setting / Clear settings
231
ISO Auto
Max. 400, Max. 800, Max. 1600,
Max. 3200, Max. 6400
100
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Disable / Low / Standard / High
White balance
Q/W/E/R/Y/U/I/O
142
Custom White
Balance
Manual setting of white balance
142
White balance shift/
bracketing
WB correction: White balance correction
BKT setting: White balance bracketing
144
145
Disable during manual exposure
Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
324
130
3 Menu Settings
Shooting 3 (Red)
Page
Color space
sRGB / Adobe RGB
146
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard /
QPortrait / RLandscape /
SNeutral / UFaithful /
VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3
101
137
140
AF operation*
One-Shot AF, AI Focus AF, AI Servo AF
103
Metering mode
q Evaluative metering / w Partial metering /
r Spot metering /
e Center-weighted average metering
121
Dust Delete Data
Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots
237
Long exposure noise
reduction
Disable / Auto / Enable
132
High ISO speed noise
reduction
Disable / Low / Standard / High /
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
131
* Cannot be set for Live View shooting.
A Live View Shooting (Red)
Live View shooting
Enable / Disable
151
AF method
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /
FlexiZone - Single / Quick mode
164
Continuous AF
Enable / Disable
161
Touch Shutter
Disable / Enable
174
Grid display
Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m
161
Aspect ratio
3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1
162
Metering timer
4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /
30 min.
163
325
3 Menu Settings
Playback 1 (Blue)
Page
Protect images
Select images / All images in folder / Unprotect
all images in folder / All images on card /
Unprotect all images on card
266
Rotate image
Rotate images
247
Erase images
Select and erase images / All images in folder /
All images on card
268
Print order
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)
291
Photobook set-up
Select images / All images in folder / Clear all in
folder / All images on card / Clear all on card
295
Creative filters
Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /
Art bold effect / Water painting effect /
Toy camera effect / Miniature effect
274
Resizing
Downsize the image’s pixel count
277
Cropping
Crop part of the image
279
Histogram display
Brightness / RGB
272
Image jump w/6
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /
Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating
243
Slide show
Playback description / Display time / Repeat /
Transition effect / Background music
258
Rating
[OFF] / l / m / n / o / p
248
Control over HDMI
Disable / Enable
263
Playback 2 (Blue)
326
3 Menu Settings
Set-up 1 (Yellow)
Page
Select folder
Create and select a folder
219
File numbering
Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset
221
Auto rotate
OnzD / OnD / Off
225
Format card
Initialize and erase data on the card
48
Eye-Fi settings*
Eye-Fi transmission: Disable / Enable
Connection information
313
* Displayed only when an Eye-Fi card is used.
Set-up 2 (Yellow)
Auto power off
30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. /
15 min. / Disable
217
LCD brightness
Seven brightness levels provided
218
LCD auto off
Enable / Disable
230
Date/Time/Zone
Date (year, month, day) / Time (hour, min., sec.) /
Daylight saving time / Time zone
37
LanguageK
Select the interface language
39
Video system
NTSC / PAL
265
327
3 Menu Settings
Set-up 3 (Yellow)
Page
Screen color
Select the shooting settings screen color
230
Feature guide
Enable / Disable
52
Touch control
Standard / Sensitive / Disable
Switch S / A button Disable / Enable
Auto cleaning: Enable / Disable
Sensor cleaning
Clean now
Clean manually
GPS device settings
Settings available when the GPS Receiver GPE2 (sold separately) is attached
55
105
236
239
-
Set-up 4 (Yellow)
Certification Logo
Display
Displays some of the logos of the camera’s
certifications
307
Custom Functions
(C.Fn)
Customize camera functions as desired
298
Copyright information
Display copyright information /
Enter author’s name /
Enter copyright details /
Delete copyright information
223
Clear settings
Clear all camera settings /
Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)
227
zfirmware ver.*
For updating the firmware
-
* During firmware updates, the touch screen will be disabled to prevent accidental
operations.
9 My Menu (Green)
My Menu settings
Register frequently-used menu options and
Custom Functions
305
When using GPS, be sure to check the countries and areas of use, and use
the device in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or
region.
328
3 Menu Settings
k Movie Shooting
Shooting 1 (Red)
Page
Image quality
73/83/74/84/7a/8a/b/c/1+73/
1
94
Beep
Enable / Touch to
216
Drive/
self-timer
u/i/Q/l/q
108
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
216
Image review
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
217
Lens aberration
correction
Peripheral illumination correction: Enable /
Disable
134
1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops
125
/ Disable
Shooting 2 (Red)
Exposure
compensation
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Disable / Low / Standard / High
White balance
Q/W/E/R/Y/U/I/O
142
Custom white
balance
Manual setting of white balance
142
White balance shift/
bracketing
WB correction: White balance correction
BKT setting: White balance bracketing
144
145
Disable during manual exposure
130
Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
The menu tabs and options displayed will differ between viewfinder
shooting/Live View shooting and movie shooting. Note that the menu
tabs and options displayed in [x1] Playback 1, [x2] Playback 2, [51]
Set-up 1 to [54] Set-up 4 and [9] My Menu are the same as those
displayed in viewfinder shooting/Live View shooting (p.326 - 328).
The [Z1] and [Z2] menu tabs will appear only for movie shooting.
329
3 Menu Settings
Shooting 3 (Red)
Page
Color space
sRGB / Adobe RGB
146
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard /
QPortrait / RLandscape /
SNeutral / UFaithful /
VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3
101
137
140
Dust Delete Data
Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots
237
Movie 1 (Red)
AF method
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /
FlexiZone - Single
207
Movie Servo AF
Enable / Disable
207
AF with shutter button
during movie shooting ONE SHOT / Disable
k
209
Grid display
Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m
209
Metering timer
4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /
30 min.
209
1920x1080 (6/5/4) / 1280x720 (8/7) /
640x480 (6/5)
193
Movie 2 (Red)
Movie recording size
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable
Sound recording*
Recording level
210
Wind filter / Attenuator: Disable / Enable
Video snapshot: Enable / Disable
Video snapshot
Album settings: Create a new album / Add to
existing album
Show confirm message: Enable/Disable
* In Basic Zone modes, [Sound recording] will be set to [On] or [Off].
330
197
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
The battery pack does not recharge.
Do not recharge any battery pack other than a genuine Canon Battery
Pack LP-E12.
The battery charger’s lamp blinks.
If the battery charger has a problem, the protection circuit will stop the
charging and the charge lamp will blink in orange. If this happens,
unplug the charger’s power plug from the power outlet and detach the
battery pack. Attach the battery pack to the charger again and wait a
while before connecting the charger to a power outlet again.
The camera does not operate even when the
power switch is set to <1>.
Make sure the battery is properly installed in the camera (p.32).
Make sure the card slot/battery compartment cover is closed (p.32).
Recharge the battery (p.30).
Press the <B> button (p.50).
The access lamp still blinks even when the power
switch is set to <2>.
If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card,
the access lamp will remain on/continue to blink for a few seconds.
When the image recording is completed, the power will turn off
automatically.
331
Troubleshooting Guide
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
Use a fully-charged battery pack (p.30).
The rechargeable battery pack performance will degrade over
repeated use. Purchase a new one.
The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Often activating only the AF without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’ Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor often.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged
period.
The camera turns off by itself.
Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take
effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.217).
Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will
still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min. (The camera’s
power does not turn off.) Press the <B> button to turn on the LCD
monitor.
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses (p.40).
332
Troubleshooting Guide
No images can be shot or recorded.
Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.32).
Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the write/erase position (p.32).
If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to
make space (p.32, 268).
If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode while the focus
confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be
taken. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically,
or focus manually (p.43, 107).
The card cannot be used.
If a card error message is displayed, see page 34 or 343.
The image is out of focus.
Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF> (p.40).
To prevent camera shake, press the shutter button gently (p.42, 43).
If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (p.114), set a higher ISO speed (p.98), use flash (p.111), or use
a tripod.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Focus lock is not possible in the
AI Servo AF mode, or when servo takes effect in AI Focus AF mode
(p.103).
333
Troubleshooting Guide
Horizontal stripes appear, or the exposure or color tone look
strange.
Horizontal stripes (noise) or irregular exposures can be caused by
fluorescent light, LED bulbs, or other light sources during viewfinder or
Live View shooting. Also, the exposure or color tone may not come out
right. A slow shutter speed may solve the problem.
The standard exposure cannot be obtained or the
exposure is irregular.
During viewfinder shooting or Live View shooting, if you use a TS-E
lens (except the TS-E 17mm f/4L or TS-E 24mm f/3.5L II) and shift or tilt
the lens or use an Extension Tube, the standard exposure may not be
obtained or the exposure may be irregular.
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
Depending on the lens type, shutter speed, aperture, subject
conditions, brightness, etc., the continuous shooting speed may
become slower.
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
With ISO 12800 or “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600), the maximum burst
for continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.99).
Set [z3: High ISO speed NR] to [Standard], [Low] or [Disable]. If it
is set to [High] or if [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is set, the
maximum burst during continuous shooting will greatly decrease
(p.131).
With [Chromatic aberration: Enable], the maximum burst for
continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.135).
During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
decrease (p.145).
If you shoot something that has fine detail (such as a field of grass),
the file size will be larger and the actual maximum burst may be lower
than the number mentioned on page 95.
334
Troubleshooting Guide
ISO 100 cannot be set.
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 cannot be set. If [0: Disable] is set, ISO
100 can be set (p.301). This also applies to movie shooting (p.186).
ISO speed [H] (equivalent to ISO 25600) cannot be set.
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], the [H] ISO speed (equivalent to ISO 25600)
cannot be selected even when [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1: On]. If
[0: Disable] is set for [3: Highlight tone priority], [H] can be set
(p.301).
The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set.
Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. If
[0: Disable] is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.301).
Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When [Standard],
[Low] or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come
out bright (p.130).
When I use the <f> mode with flash, the shutter
speed becomes slow.
If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed
becomes slow automatically (slow-sync shooting) so that both the
subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow
shutter speed, under [z2: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in
Av mode] to [1/200-1/60 sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] (p.232).
335
Troubleshooting Guide
The built-in flash is raised by itself.
In shooting modes (<A> <C> <2> <4> <C> <6>) whose
default setting is <a> (Auto flash), the built-in flash will rise
automatically when necessary.
The built-in flash does not fire.
If you shoot continuously with the built-in flash at short intervals, the
flash may stop operating to protect the flash unit.
The flash always fires at full output.
If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will
always be fired at full output (p.312).
Under [z2: Flash control] and [External flash C.Fn setting], if
[Flash metering mode] is set to [TTL], the flash will always fire at full
output (p.233).
I cannot set flash exposure compensation when
using an external Speedlite.
If flash exposure compensation has already been set with the external
Speedlite, flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the
camera. When the external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation
is canceled (set to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with
the camera.
High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.
Under [z2: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to
[Auto] (p.232).
The camera makes a noise when it is shaken.
The built-in flash’s pop-up mechanism moves slightly. This is normal
and not a malfunction.
336
Troubleshooting Guide
The shutter makes two shooting sounds during
Live View shooting.
If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot
(p.151).
With FlexiZone - Multi, it takes longer to autofocus.
Depending on the shooting conditions, focusing the subject may take
longer. Either use FlexiZone - Single or focus manually.
During Live View and movie shooting, a white <s> or red
<E> icon is displayed.
It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white
<s> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.
If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or
movie shooting will soon stop automatically (p.178, 212).
Movie shooting stops by itself.
If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
automatically. Use an SD Speed Class 6 “
” or faster card. To
find out the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website, etc.
If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
In shooting modes other than <a>, the ISO speed is set
automatically. In the <a> mode, you can freely set the ISO speed
(p.186).
337
Troubleshooting Guide
The exposure changes during movie shooting.
If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the
exposure regardless of whether the lens’ maximum aperture changes
or not. The changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (high-speed panning)
or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during
movie shooting.
Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent light, LED bulbs, or other light sources during
movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or color
tone may be recorded. In the <a> mode, a slow shutter speed may
solve the problem.
Operation Problems
During touch screen operations, the beeper suddenly
sounds softer.
Check if your finger is blocking the speaker (p.22).
Touch screen operation is not possible.
Check if [53: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive]
(p.55).
338
Troubleshooting Guide
Display Problems
The menu screen shows few tabs and options.
In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain tabs and
menu options are not displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative
Zone mode (p.46).
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character
will be an underscore (p.146).
The file name starts with “MVI_”.
It is a movie file (p.222).
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may
not start from 0001 (p.221).
The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.
Make sure the correct date and time has been set (p.37).
Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.37).
The date and time is not in the picture.
The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture. The date
and time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting
information. When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the
picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information
(p.287).
339
Troubleshooting Guide
[###] is displayed.
If the card has recorded a number of images greater than the camera
can display, [###] will be displayed (p.249).
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow
or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.
[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.
[Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in
the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the
LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection
status or disable Eye-Fi transmission (p.313).
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
It is the highlight alert (p.272). Overexposed highlight areas with a loss
of highlight detail will blink.
The image cannot be erased.
If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.266).
The movie cannot be played back.
Movies edited with a computer using the provided ImageBrowser EX
(p.365) or other software cannot be played back with the camera.
However, video snapshot albums edited with EOS Video Snapshot
Task (p.206) can be played on the camera.
340
Troubleshooting Guide
When the movie is played back, camera operation
noise can be heard.
If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the
operation noise will also be recorded. Using an external microphone
(commercially available) is recommended (p.210).
The movie has still moments.
During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the
exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
stabilizes. If this happens, shoot with <a> shooting mode (p.185).
No image appears on the TV screen.
Make sure the stereo AV cable or HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the
way in (p.262, 265).
Set the video OUT system (NTSC/PAL) to the same video system as
the TV set (p.265).
There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created
automatically (p.194).
My card reader does not recognize the card.
Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards
may not be correctly recognized. If this occurs, connect your camera
to the computer with the provided interface cable, then transfer the
images to your computer using EOS Utility (provided software, p.365).
I cannot resize the image. I cannot crop the image.
JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized or cropped (p.277,
p.279).
341
Troubleshooting Guide
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.
If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise, but no
picture is taken (p.236).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> / <2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.35).
Printing-Related Problems
There are fewer printing effects than listed in
the instruction manual.
What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer. This
instruction manual lists all the printing effects available (p.286).
Computer Connection Problems
I cannot download images to a computer.
Install the provided software (EOS Solution Disk CD-ROM) on the
computer (p.366).
342
Error Codes
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Error number
Cause and countermeasures
Number
01
02
Error Message and Solution
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
Î Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens or use a
Canon lens (p.21, 22).
Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card
with camera.
Î Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the
card (p.32, 48).
Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.
04
05
Î Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
(p.32, 268, 48).
The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on
again.
Î Operate the power switch (p.35).
06
Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and
on again.
Î Operate the power switch (p.35).
10, 20
30, 40
50, 60
70, 80
99
An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or
re-install the battery.
Î Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack
again, or use a Canon lens (p.35, 32).
* If the error still persists, write down the error number and contact your
nearest Canon Service Center.
343
Specifications
• Type
Type:
Recording media:
Image sensor size:
Compatible lenses:
Lens mount:
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in flash
SD memory card, SDHC memory card, SDXC memory card
* Compatible with UHS-I
Approx. 22.3 x 14.9 mm
Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)
* Excluding EF-M lenses
(35 mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the
lens focal length)
Canon EF mount
• Image Sensor
Type:
Effective pixels:
Aspect ratio:
Dust delete feature:
CMOS sensor
Approx. 18.0 megapixels
3:2
Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending
• Recording System
Recording format:
Image type:
Recorded pixels:
Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original)
RAW+JPEG Large simultaneous recording possible
L (Large)
:Approx. 17.9 megapixels (5184 x 3456)
M (Medium) : Approx. 8.0 megapixels (3456 x 2304)
S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 4.5 megapixels (2592 x 1728)
S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.5 megapixels (1920 x 1280)
S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)
RAW
: Approx. 17.9 megapixels (5184 x 3456)
• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style:
Basic+:
Extra Effect Shot:
White balance:
Noise reduction:
Automatic image
brightness correction:
Highlight tone priority:
Lens aberration
correction:
344
Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,
Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3
Ambience-based shots, Light/scene-based shots
Possible (in <CA> mode)
Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,
White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom
White Balance correction and White balance bracketing possible
* Flash color temperature information transmission enabled
Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Provided
Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration
correction
Specifications
• Viewfinder
Type:
Coverage:
Magnification:
Eye point:
Built-in dioptric adjustment:
Focusing screen:
Mirror:
Depth-of-field preview:
Eye-level pentamirror
Vertical/Horizontal approx. 95% (with Eye point approx. 19 mm)
Approx. 0.87x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)
Approx. 19 mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)
Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Fixed, Precision Matte
Quick-return type
Provided
• Autofocus
Type:
AF points:
TTL secondary image-registration, phase detection
9-point AF (Center point: cross-type and vertical linesensitive to f/2.8)
Focusing brightness range: EV -0.5 - 18 (Center AF point, at room temperature, ISO 100)
AF operation:
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF
AF-assist beam:
Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash
• Exposure Control
Metering modes:
63-zone TTL full-aperture metering
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)
• Partial metering (approx. 9% of viewfinder at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 4% of viewfinder at center)
• Center-weighted average metering
Metering brightness range: EV 1 - 20 (at room temperature with EF 50mm f/1.8 II lens, ISO 100)
Exposure control:
Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Flash Off, Creative
Auto, Portrait, Landscape, Close-up, Sports, Special scene
modes (Kids, Food, Candlelight, Night Portrait, Handheld
Night Scene, HDR Backlight Control), Program), Shutterpriority AE, Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure
ISO speed:
Basic Zone modes*: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set automatically
(Recommended
* Landscape: ISO 100 - ISO 1600, <SCN> Handheld
exposure index)
Night Scene: ISO 100 - ISO 12800
Creative Zone modes: ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set
manually (whole-stop increments), ISO 100 - ISO 6400
set automatically, maximum ISO speed settable for ISO
Auto, or ISO expansion to “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600)
Exposure
Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
compensation:
AEB:
±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
AE lock:
Auto:
Applied in One-Shot AF with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
Manual: By AE lock button
345
Specifications
• Shutter
Type:
Shutter speeds:
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
1/4000 sec. to 30 sec. (Total shutter speed range.
Available range varies by shooting mode.), Bulb, X-sync
at 1/200 sec.
• Flash
Built-in flash:
External flash:
Flash metering:
Flash exposure
compensation:
FE lock:
PC terminal:
Retractable, auto pop-up flash
Guide No.: Approx. 9.4/30.8 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)
Flash coverage: Approx. 18mm lens angle of view
Recycling time approx. 3 sec.
EX-series Speedlite (Flash functions settable with the
camera)
E-TTL II autoflash
±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
Provided
None
• Drive System
Drive modes:
Continuous shooting
speed:
Max. burst (Approx.):
Single shooting, Continuous shooting, Silent single
shooting, Silent continuous shooting, Self-timer with 10-sec.
or 2-sec. delay and 10-sec. delay with continuous shooting
Continuous shooting: Max. approx. 4 shots/sec.
Silent continuous shooting: Max. approx. 2.5 shots/sec.
JPEG Large/Fine: 28 (1140) shots
RAW: 7 (8) shots
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: 4 (4) shots
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible
8 GB card based on Canon’s testing standards.
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (ISO
100 and Standard Picture Style) using an 8 GB card.
• Live View Shooting
Aspect ratio settings:
Focus methods:
Continuous AF:
Touch shutter:
346
3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1
Hybrid CMOS AF II System* (Face+Tracking, FlexiZoneMulti, FlexiZone-Single), Phase-difference detection
(Quick mode)
Manual focus (approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)
* Focusing brightness range: EV 1 - 18 (at room
temperature, ISO 100)
Provided
Provided
Specifications
Metering modes:
Real-time metering with image sensor
Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering
(approx. 10% of Live View screen), Spot metering
(approx. 2.6% of Live View screen), Center-weighted
average metering
Metering brightness range: EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM
lens, ISO 100)
Creative Filter:
Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect
Grid display:
Two types
• Movie Shooting
Recording format:
Movie:
MOV
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Variable (average) bit rate
Audio:
Linear PCM
Recording size and
1920x1080 (Full HD): 30p/25p/24p
frame rate:
1280x720 (HD)
: 60p/50p
640x480 (SD)
: 30p/25p
* 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25.00 fps, 24p: 23.98 fps,
60p: 59.94 fps, 50p: 50.00 fps
File size:
1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p): Approx. 330 MB/min.
1280x720 (60p/50p)
: Approx. 330 MB/min.
640x480 (30p/25p)
: Approx. 82.5 MB/min.
Focusing:
Hybrid CMOS AF II System* (Face+Tracking, FlexiZoneMulti, FlexiZone-Single)
Manual focus (approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)
* Focusing brightness range: EV 1 - 18 (at room
temperature, ISO 100)
Metering modes:
Center-weighted average and evaluative metering with
the image sensor
* Automatically set by the focusing mode
Servo AF:
Provided
Metering brightness range: EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM
lens, ISO 100)
Exposure control:
Program AE for movies and manual exposure
Exposure
±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments (Still photos: ±5 stops)
compensation:
With autoexposure shooting:
ISO speed:
ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set automatically
(Recommended
With manual exposure: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set
exposure index)
automatically/manually, expandable to H (equivalent to
ISO 12800)
347
Specifications
Video snapshots:
Miniature effect movie:
Sound recording:
Grid display:
Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
Possible
Built-in monaural microphone
External stereo microphone terminal provided
Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,
attenuator provided
Two types
• LCD Monitor
Type:
Monitor size and dots:
Brightness adjustment:
Interface languages:
Touch screen
technology:
Feature guide:
TFT color liquid-crystal monitor
Wide, 7.7 cm (3.0-in.) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots
Manual (7 levels)
25
Capacitive sensing
Displayable
• Playback
Image display formats:
Zoom magnification:
Highlight alert:
Image browsing
methods:
Image rotate:
Ratings:
Movie playback:
Image protect:
Slide show:
Background music:
Single image display, Single image + Info display (Basic
info, shooting info, histogram), image index (4/9/36/100)
Approx. 1.5x - 10x
Overexposed highlights blink
Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting
date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating
Possible
Provided
Enabled (LCD monitor, video/audio OUT, HDMI OUT)
Built-in speaker
Possible
All images, by date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating
Five transition effects selectable
Selectable for slide shows and movie playback
• Post-Processing of Images
Creative filters:
Resize:
Cropping:
Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect
Possible
Possible
• Direct Printing
Compatible printers:
Printable images:
Print ordering:
348
PictBridge-compatible printers
JPEG and RAW images
DPOF Version 1.1 compatible
Specifications
• Custom Functions
Custom Functions:
My Menu registration:
Copyright information:
8
Possible
Entry and inclusion enabled
• Interface
Audio/video OUT/Digital Analog video (compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio
terminal:
output
Computer communication, Direct printing (Hi-Speed
USB equivalent), GPS Receiver GP-E2 connection
HDMI mini OUT
Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
terminal:
External microphone IN 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
terminal:
Remote control terminal: For Remote Switch RS-60E3
Wireless remote control: Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6
Eye-Fi card:
Compatible
• Power
Battery:
Battery Pack LP-E12 (Quantity 1)
* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E15
With viewfinder shooting:
Number of possible
shots:
(Based on CIPA testing Approx. 380 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 350 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
standards)
With Live View shooting: Approx. 150 shots at room
temperature (23°C/73°F), approx. 140 shots at low
temperatures (0°C/32°F)
Movie shooting time:
Approx. 1 hr. 5 min. at room temperature (23°C/73°F)
Approx. 1 hr. at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
(with a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E12)
• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx.116.8 x 90.7 x 69.4 mm / 4.60 x 3.57 x 2.74 in.
Weight:
Approx. 407 g / 14.36 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),
Approx. 370 g / 13.06 oz. (Body only)
• Operation Environment
Working temperature
range:
Working humidity:
0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
85% or less
349
Specifications
• Battery Pack LP-E12
Type:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated voltage:
7.2 V DC
Battery capacity:
875 mAh
Working temperature
During charging: 5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
range:
During shooting: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
Working humidity:
85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 32.5 x 12.5 x 48.5 mm / 1.3 x 0.49 x 1.9 in.
Weight:
Approx. 35 g / 1.2 oz.
• Battery Charger LC-E12
Compatible battery:
Battery Pack LP-E12
Recharging time:
Approx. 2 hours (at room temperature (23°C/73°F))
Rated input:
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Rated output:
8.4 V DC / 540 mA
Working temperature
5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
range:
Working humidity:
85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 65 x 25.5 x 90 mm / 2.6 x 1.0 x 3.5 in.
Weight:
Approx. 81 g / 2.9 oz.
• Battery Charger LC-E12E
Compatible battery:
Battery Pack LP-E12
Recharging time:
Approx. 2 hours (at room temperature (23°C/73°F))
Rated input:
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Rated output:
8.4 V DC / 540 mA
Working temperature
5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
range:
Working humidity:
85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 65 x 25.5 x 90 mm / 2.6 x 1.0 x 3.5 in. (excluding
power cord)
Weight:
Approx 76 g / 2.7 oz. (excluding power cord)
• EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 III
Angle of view:
Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 27°50’
Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 23°20’
Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 15°40’
Lens construction:
11 elements in 9 groups
Minimum aperture:
f/22 - 36
Closest focusing distance: 0.25 m / 0.82 ft. (From image sensor plane)
Max. magnification:
0.34x (at 55mm)
350
Specifications
Field of view:
207 x 134 - 67 x 45 mm / 8.1 x 5.3 - 2.6 x 1.8 in.
(at 0.25 m / 0.82 ft.)
Filter size:
58 mm
Lens cap:
E-58/E-58 II
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 68.5 x 70.0 mm / 2.7 x 2.8 in.
Weight:
Approx. 195 g / 6.9 oz.
Hood:
EW-60C (sold separately)
Case:
LP814 (sold separately)
All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on
CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).
Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens manufacturer.
351
Trademarks
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
in the United States and other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
All other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this
manual are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”
* Notice displayed in English as required.
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such
as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g.,
a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty
does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.
352
Safety Precautions
The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to
yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow
these precautions before using the product.
If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the
product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer
from whom you purchased the product.
Warnings:
Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or
serious injuries may result.
To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,
follow the safeguards below:
• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the
Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or
solder to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the
battery to strong physical shock.
• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.
• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable ambient
temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharging time indicated in the
Instruction Manual.
• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent
contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent a fire or an explosion.
If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage or electrical shock.
If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it
immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire,
electrical shock or skin burn if you keep using it.
Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or
clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a
physician immediately.
Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the
camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is
recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when
using the camera in very hot places.
Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an accident.
Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When
using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away.
353
Safety Precautions
When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery
and disconnect the power plug from the equipment before storing. This is to prevent
electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, or corrosion.
Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an
explosion or a fire.
If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts,
do not touch the internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.
Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause
electrical shock.
Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or
lens. Doing so may damage your vision.
Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. Straps
or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury
may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If
a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.
Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, store the battery with
its protective cover attached to prevent short-circuit. This is to prevent a fire,
excessive heat, electrical shock, or burn.
Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
• Always insert the power plug all the way in.
• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the
cord. Also do not twist or tie the cords.
• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.
Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet
with a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power
outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.
Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter
outlet. The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing a fire,
burns or injuries.
A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the
product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.
Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.
Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and
cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water
or metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery. This is to prevent a fire
and an electrical shock.
Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.
354
Safety Precautions
Cautions:
Follow the cautions below. Otherwise physical injury
or property damage may result.
Do not use or store the product inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source.
The product may become hot and cause skin burns. Doing so may also cause
battery leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or shorten the life
of the product.
Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.
Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of
time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.
Never play the provided CD-ROM in a drive that is not compatible with the CD-ROM.
If you use it in a music CD player, you may damage the speakers and other
components. When using headphones, there is also a risk of injury to your ears from
excessively loud volume.
355
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway,
Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be
disposed of with your household waste, according to
the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery
Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation
implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol
shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive,
this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is
present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable
threshold specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an
authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an
authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment
(EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste
could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to
potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. Your
cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective
usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your
local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste
disposal service or visit
www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canon-europe.com/battery.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
356
357
358
13
Viewing the DVD-ROM Instruction Manuals /
Downloading Images to Your Computer
This chapter explains how to view the Camera and
Software Instruction Manuals (on the DVD-ROM
provided) on your computer, download images from the
camera to your computer, gives an overview of the
software in the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM), and
explains how to install the software on your computer.
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
.
e EU
NON IN
C. 20XX. Made in th
EOS Camera
Instruction Manuals
Disk
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
EOS Solution
Disk
(Software)
359
Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk XXX
The EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
contains the following instruction manuals (PDF):
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
© CA
.
e EU
NON IN
C. 20XX. Made in th
Instruction Manual
Explains all the camera functions and procedures, including basic content (this
booklet)
Software Instruction Manuals
Software Instruction Manuals PDFs for the software supplied on the EOS
Solution Disk (see p.365)
360
Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
[WINDOWS]
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
© CA
.
e EU
NON IN
C. 20XX. Made in th
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk
Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to
your computer.
1
Insert the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD) into the
DVD-ROM drive of your computer.
2
Double-click [My Computer] on the desktop and then double-click
the DVD-ROM drive into which you have inserted the disk.
3
Click on the name of the instruction manual you want to view.
Select your language and operating system.
XThe index of the Instruction Manuals is displayed.
B
ENGLISH
The “Quick Reference Guide” is included at the end of this manual.
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Instruction Manual
Adobe Reader (latest version recommended) must be installed to view the Instruction
Manual files (PDF format). Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your
computer.
To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Save’ function of your Adobe
Reader. For more information about how to use Adobe Reader, see Adobe Reader’s
Help menu.
361
Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
Viewing the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD-ROM)
[MACINTOSH]
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
© CA
.
e EU
NON IN
C. 20XX. Made in th
EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk
Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the disk to
your computer.
1
Insert the EOS Camera Instruction Manuals Disk (DVD) into the
DVD-ROM drive of your Macintosh.
2
3
4
Double-click on the disk icon.
Double-click the START.html file.
Click on the name of the instruction manual you want to view.
Select your language and operating system.
XThe index of the Instruction Manuals is displayed.
B
ENGLISH
The “Quick Reference Guide” is included at the end of this manual.
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Instruction Manual
Adobe Reader (latest version recommended) must be installed to view the Instruction
Manual files (PDF format). Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your
Macintosh.
To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Save’ function of your Adobe
Reader. For more information about how to use Adobe Reader, see Adobe Reader’s
Help menu.
362
Downloading Images to a Computer
You can use the provided software to download the images in the
camera to your computer. There are two ways to do this.
Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer
1
Install the software (p.366).
the provided interface cable
2 Use
to connect the camera to your
computer.
Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
Connect the cable to the camera’s
<C> terminal with the cable
plug’s <D> icon facing the front of
the camera.
Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
EOS Utility to download the
3 Use
images.
For details, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual (p.361).
363
Downloading Images to a Computer
Downloading Images with a Card Reader
You can also use a card reader to download images to your computer.
Install the software (p.366).
1
the card into the card
2 Insert
reader.
Canon software to download
3 Use
the images.
X Use Digital Photo Professional.
X Use ImageBrowser EX.
For details, refer to the Software
Instruction Manual (p.361).
When downloading images from the camera to your computer using a card
reader without using Canon software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to
your computer.
364
About the Software
EOS Solution Disk XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
EOS Solution Disk
This disk contains various software for EOS cameras.
CEL-XXX XXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
Note that the software provided with previous cameras might not support
still photos and movie files shot with this camera. Please use the software
provided with this camera.
a EOS Utility
Communication Software for the Camera and Computer
You can download images (still images/movies) you have shot with the camera to
your computer.
You can set the various settings of the camera from your computer.
You can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera to your computer.
You can copy background music tracks to the card, and play the background music
during playback.
b Digital Photo Professional
Image Viewing and Editing Software
You can view, edit and print shot images on your computer at high-speed.
You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged.
Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to professionals. It is especially
recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images.
c Picture Style Editor
Picture Style File Creating Software
This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in processing images.
You can edit Picture Style to your unique image characteristics and create/save an
original Picture Style file.
d ImageBrowser EX
Image Viewing and Editing Software
Connect to the Internet to download and install the software.*
You can view, browse and print JPEG images on your computer.
You can play movies (MOV files), video snapshot albums, and extract still photos from
movies.
Recommended for novices who are using a digital camera for the first time and
amateur users.
* EOS Solution Disk is necessary for downloading and installing ImageBrowser EX.
365
Installing the Software
Installing the Software on Windows
Compatible OS
1
Windows 8
Windows 7
Windows Vista Windows XP
Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.
Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install
the software. The software will not be installed correctly.
When downloading and installing ImageBrowser EX, follow the steps
below as with other EOS software included on the EOS Solution Disk.
Note that Internet connection is necessary. Downloading or installing
software is not possible in environments with no Internet connection.
Even if your computer already has ImageBrowser EX installed, follow
the steps below to reinstall ImageBrowser EX. It will be updated to the
latest version with features optimized for your camera. Also, the latest
functions may be added with the auto update feature.
For software other than ImageBrowser EX, if a previous version is
installed, follow the steps below to reinstall the software. (The newer
version will overwrite the previous version.)
2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM).
3 Select your geographic area, country and language.
4 Click [Easy Installation] to start installation.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation
procedure.
If prompted, install Microsoft Silverlight.
5 Click [Finish] when the installation has completed.
6 Remove the CD.
366
Installing the Software
Installing the Software on Macintosh
Compatible OS
1
MAC OS X 10.6 - 10.8
Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.
Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install
the software. The software will not be installed correctly.
When downloading and installing ImageBrowser EX, follow the steps
below as with other EOS software included on the EOS Solution Disk.
Note that Internet connection is necessary. Downloading or installing
software is not possible in environments with no Internet connection.
Even if your computer already has ImageBrowser EX installed, follow
the steps below to reinstall ImageBrowser EX. It will be updated to the
latest version with features optimized for your camera. Also, the latest
functions may be added with the auto update feature.
For software other than ImageBrowser EX, if a previous version is
installed, follow the steps below to reinstall the software. (The newer
version will overwrite the previous version.)
2 Insert the
EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM).
On your computer’s desktop, double-click and open the CD-ROM
icon, and then double-click [setup].
3 Select your geographic area, country and language.
4 Click [Easy Installation] to start installation.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation
procedure.
5 Click [Restart] when the installation has completed.
6 Once the computer has restarted, remove the CD.
367
368
14
Quick Reference Guide
and Index
Menu Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.370
Image-recording Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.371
A Picture Style- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.371
Q Quick Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.372
Nomenclature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.373
Basic Zone modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.375
DUsing the Built-in Flash - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.375
Creative Zone modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376
d: Program AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376
s: Shutter-priority AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376
f: Aperture-priority AE- - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.376
f: AF Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.377
S AF Point - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.377
i: ISO Speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.378
i Drive Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.378
A Live View Shooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.379
k Movie Shooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.380
Image Playback - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.381
369
Quick Reference Guide
Menu Operations
<M>
button
<0>
button
LCD
monitor/
Touch
screen
<S>
cross keys
1. Press the <M> button to display the menu.
2. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a tab, then press the
<W> <X> keys to select the desired item.
3. Press <0> to display the setting.
4. After setting the item, press <0>.
Basic Zone Modes
Movie Shooting
Creative Zone
Modes
Tabs
Menu items
370
Menu settings
Quick Reference Guide
Image-Recording Quality
o Select [z 1: Image quality], then press <0>.
o Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the quality, then press
<0>.
Image-recording quality
Recorded pixels
Possible shots
A Picture StyleN
o Select [z 3: Picture Style],
then press <0>.
o Press the <W> <X> keys to
select the Picture Style, then
press <0>.
Style
Description
D Auto
P Standard
Color tones optimized for the particular scene.
Q Portrait
R Landscape
Nice skin tones and slightly sharp images.
Vivid colors and sharp images.
Vivid blue skies and greenery and very sharp images.
V Monochrome Black-and-white images.
o For < S > (Neutral) and < U > (Faithful), see page 102.
371
Quick Reference Guide
Q Quick Control
o Press the < Q> button.
The Quick Control screen will
appear.
Basic Zone Modes
Shutter speed
Shooting mode
Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting
Picture Style
AF operation
White
balance
Return
White balance correction
Creative Zone Modes
Aperture
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
Flash exposure
compensation
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Metering mode
Image-recording
quality
White balance bracketing
Drive/self-timer
o In Basic Zone modes, the settable functions differ
depending on the shooting mode.
o Press the <S> cross keys to select a function, then turn
the <6> dial to set it.
372
Quick Reference Guide
Nomenclature
Power switch
<i> ISO speed
setting button
<6>
Main Dial
Mode Dial
<D> Flash
button
Shutter button
Focus mode switch
<O> Aperture/Exposure
compensation button
<A> Live View
shooting/
Movie shooting
button
<S> AF point
selection button
<A> AE lock
button
<S>
cross keys
<L>
Erase
button
<Q/0> Quick Control button/
Setting button
Access
lamp
373
Quick Reference Guide
Shooting Settings
Shutter speed
White balance
Exposure level
indicator
Aperture
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Shooting mode
ISO speed
Picture Style
Metering mode
AF operation
Image-recording
quality
Quick Control
icon
Possible shots
Battery check
Drive/self-timer
zxcn
Viewfinder Information
AF point activation indicator <•>
Spot metering
circle
AF points
AE lock
Flash-ready
Flash exposure
compensation
Shutter speed
Aperture
374
Focus
confirmation light
Max. burst
Monochrome shooting
ISO speed
Exposure level indicator
Quick Reference Guide
Basic Zone Modes
All the settings necessary for
shooting are set automatically.
You just press the shutter
button, and the camera does
the rest.
A Scene Intelligent Auto
7 Flash Off
C Creative Auto
2 Portrait
3 Landscape
4 Close-up
5 Sports
8 Special scene
C Kids
P Food
x Candlelight
6 Night Portrait
F Handheld Night Scene
G HDR Backlight Control
D Using the Built-in Flash
Basic Zone Modes
If necessary, the built-in flash will be raised and fire
automatically in low-light or backlit conditions (with certain
shooting modes).
Creative Zone Modes
o Press the <D> button to raise the
built-in flash, then shoot.
375
Quick Reference Guide
Creative Zone Modes
You can change the camera
settings as desired to shoot in
various ways.
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and
aperture in the same way as the <A> mode.
o Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
s: Shutter-priority AE
o Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
o Turn the <6> dial to set the
desired shutter speed, then
focus the subject.
The aperture will be set automatically.
o If the aperture display blinks, turn
the <6> dial until it stops blinking.
f: Aperture-priority AE
o Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
o Turn the <6> dial to set the desired
aperture, then focus the subject.
The shutter speed will be set automatically.
o If the shutter speed display
blinks, turn the <6> dial until
it stops blinking.
376
Quick Reference Guide
f: AF OperationN
o Set the lens focus mode switch
to <f>.
o Select [z 3: AF operation],
then press <0>.
o Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the AF operation, then press <0>.
X(One-Shot AF):
For still subjects
9(AI Focus AF):
Switches the AF operation automatically
Z(AI Servo AF):
For moving subjects
S AF PointN
o Press the <S> button.
o Press the <S> cross keys to
select the AF point.
o While looking through the
viewfinder, you can select the
AF point by turning the <6>
dial until the desired AF point
flashes in red.
o Pressing <0> toggles the
AF point selection between the
center AF point and automatic
AF point selection.
377
Quick Reference Guide
i: ISO SpeedN
o Press the <i> button.
o Press the <Y> <Z> keys or turn
the <6> dial to select the ISO
speed, then press <0>.
o When [AUTO] is selected, the
ISO speed is set automatically.
When you press the shutter
button halfway, the ISO speed
setting is displayed.
i Drive Mode
o Select [z 1: Drive/self-tmr],
then press <0>.
o Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the drive mode, then press <0>.
u : Single shooting
i : Continuous shooting
B : Silent single shooting*
M : Silent continuous shooting*
Q : Self-timer:10 sec./
Remote control
l : Self-timer:2 sec.
q : Self-timer:Continuous
* Not selectable in Basic Zone modes.
378
Quick Reference Guide
A Live View Shooting
o Press the <A> button to display
the Live View image.
o Press the shutter button halfway
to focus.
o Press the shutter button
completely to take the picture.
o Number of Possible Shots (Live View Shooting)
Temperature
No Flash
50% Flash Use
At 23°C / 73°F
Approx. 160 shots Approx. 150 shots
379
Quick Reference Guide
k Movie Shooting (Autoexposure)
o Set the power switch to <k>.
o Set the Mode Dial to any
shooting mode except <a>.
o Press the <A> button to start
shooting a movie.
o To stop movie shooting, press
the <A> button again.
Recording movie
Microphone
380
Quick Reference Guide
Image Playback
y
u
Index
y
u
Magnify
Select image
S
L Erase
x Playback
B Shooting information
381
Index
Numerics
10- or 2-sec. self-timer..................110
1280x720 ......................................193
1920x1080 ....................................193
640x480 ........................................193
9-point AF auto selection ..............105
A
A (Scene Intelligent Auto)............58
AC Adapter Kit ..............................308
Access lamp ...................................34
Accessories ......................................4
Adobe RGB...................................146
AE lock..........................................127
AEB.......................................125, 300
AF 9 Focusing
AF point ........................................105
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)..............104
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ..............104
Ambience-based shots ...................82
Aperture-priority AE ......................116
Art bold effect........................159, 276
Aspect ratio...................................162
Auto Lighting Optimizer ................130
Auto playback ...............................258
Auto power off.........................35, 217
Auto reset .....................................222
Auto rotate ....................................225
Autofocus..............................103, 105
Automatic selection of AF point ....105
Av (Aperture-priority AE)...............116
Availability of functions by shooting
mode.............................................316
A/V OUT
(Audio/video output)..............252, 265
B
B/W (Monochrome)...............102, 139
382
Background blur ............................. 66
Background music........................ 261
Basic Zone modes ......................... 26
Battery................................ 30, 32, 36
Battery check ................................. 36
Beep (Beeper).............................. 216
Black-and-white image... 82, 102, 139
Bracketing ............................ 125, 145
Brightness (exposure) .................. 123
Auto exposure bracketing
(AEB) ............................... 125, 300
Autoexposure lock (AE lock).... 127
Exposure compensation .......... 123
Measurement method
(metering mode) ...................... 121
Built-in flash.................................. 111
BULB (bulb exposure).................. 120
C
C (Creative Auto)......................... 64
Cable........ 4, 262, 265, 282, 322, 363
Camera
Camera shake ......................... 147
Clear camera settings.............. 227
Holding the camera.................... 42
Settings display........................ 226
Candlelight ..................................... 75
Cards.................................. 21, 32, 48
Card reminder.......................... 216
Formatting.................................. 48
Low-level formatting................... 49
Problems.............................. 34, 49
SD speed class............................ 3
Write-protect switch ................... 32
Center-weighted average
metering ....................................... 122
Charger .................................... 27, 30
Chromatic aberration correction... 135
Cleaning (image sensor) ...... 236, 239
Clear camera settings .................. 227
Index
Close-up..........................................70
Color space
(color reproduction range).............146
Color temperature .........................142
Color tone ...............................80, 138
Continuous file numbering ............221
Continuous shooting .....................108
Contrast ........................................138
Copyright information....................223
Creative Auto ..................................64
Creative filters .......................157, 274
M (Creative Zone) icon....................8
Creative Zone modes......................26
Cropping .......................................279
Custom Functions .........................298
D
Date/Time .......................................37
Daylight saving time........................38
DC Coupler ...................................308
Depth-of-field preview ...................118
Dial..........................................22, 113
Digital terminal ......................282, 363
Dioptric adjustment .........................42
Direct printing................................282
DPOF ............................................291
Dragging .........................................54
Drive mode................24, 67, 108, 110
Dust Delete Data...........................237
E
Erasing images .............................268
Error codes ...................................343
Evaluative metering ......................121
Exposure compensation ...............123
Exposure level increments............300
External flash ................................311
Extra Effect Shot .............................65
Eyecup ......................................... 310
Eye-Fi card ................................... 313
Eyepiece cover....................... 29, 310
F
Faithful.......................................... 102
FE lock ......................................... 128
Feature guide ................................. 52
FEB (flash exposure bracketing) .. 233
File extension ............................... 222
File name...................................... 221
File size .......................... 95, 194, 270
Filter effect.................................... 139
Final image simulation.......... 154, 189
Fine (image-recording quality)........ 24
Firmware version.......................... 328
First-curtain synchronization ........ 234
Fish-eye effect...................... 159, 275
Flash
Built-in flash ............................. 111
Custom Functions .................... 235
Effective range ......................... 111
External flash ........................... 311
FE lock ..................................... 128
Flash control ............................ 231
Flash exposure
compensation........................... 124
Flash off ......................... 63, 67, 81
Flash sync speed ..................... 312
Manual flash............................. 234
Red-eye reduction.................... 112
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain) ....................... 234
Flash mode........................... 233, 234
Flash sync contacts ........................ 22
Focus confirmation light ................. 58
Focus lock ...................................... 61
Focus mode switch......... 40, 107, 176
Focusing
AF method ....................... 164, 207
383
Index
AF operation.............................103
AF point selection.....................105
AF-assist beam ................106, 302
Beep (Beeper) ..........................216
Difficulty focusing .....107, 170, 208
Manual focusing ...............107, 176
Out of focus ................42, 107, 170
Recomposing .............................61
Folder creation/selection...............219
Food................................................74
Formatting (card initialization).........48
Frame rate ....................................193
Full Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...58
Full High-Definition
(Full HD) ...............................193, 252
G
Grainy B/W ...........................159, 275
Grid .......................................161, 209
H
Handheld Night Scene....................77
HDMI.....................................252, 262
HDMI CEC ....................................263
HDR Backlight Control....................78
High ISO speed noise reduction ...131
High-Definition (HD) movies .193, 252
Highlight alert................................272
Highlight detail loss.......................272
Highlight tone priority ....................301
Histogram (Brightness/RGB) ........272
Hot shoe .......................................311
Household power..........................308
I
ICC profile.....................................146
Image area......................................41
Image dust prevention ..236, 237, 239
Image review time.........................217
Image-recording quality ..................94
384
Images
Auto playback .......................... 258
Auto rotate ............................... 225
Erasing..................................... 268
Highlight alert........................... 272
Histogram display .................... 272
Image characteristics
(Picture Style) .......... 101, 137, 140
Index ........................................ 242
Jump display
(image browsing) ..................... 243
Magnified view ......................... 244
Manual rotate ........................... 247
Numbering ............................... 221
Playback ............................ 89, 241
Protecting................................. 266
Rating ...................................... 248
Review time ............................. 217
Shooting information................ 270
Slide show ............................... 258
Transfer.................................... 313
Viewing on a TV set ......... 252, 262
Index display ................................ 242
ISO speed ...................................... 98
Automatic setting (Auto) ............ 99
ISO expansion ......................... 300
Maximum ISO speed for
ISO Auto .................................. 100
J
JPEG.............................................. 95
Jump display ................................ 243
K
Kids ................................................ 73
L
Landscape.............................. 69, 102
Language selection ........................ 39
Large (image-recording quality) ..... 24
LCD monitor ................................... 21
Brightness adjustment ............. 218
Image playback.................. 89, 241
Index
Menu display ......................46, 324
Screen color .............................230
Shooting settings ..................24, 50
Lens ................................................40
Chromatic aberration
correction..................................135
Lock release ...............................41
Peripheral illumination
correction..................................134
Lighting/scene-based shots ............86
Live View shooting ..................62, 149
Aspect ratio...............................162
Continuous AF..........................161
Face+Tracking..........................164
FlexiZone - Multi .......................166
FlexiZone - Single.....................168
Grid display...............................161
Information display ...................152
Manual focusing ...............107, 176
Metering timer...........................163
Possible shots ..........................151
Quick Control............................155
Quick mode ..............................172
Long exposure noise reduction.....132
Long exposures ............................120
M
M (Manual exposure) ............119, 185
Macro photography .........................70
Magnification.........................176, 244
Malfunction....................................331
Manual exposure ..................119, 185
Manual focus (MF) ................107, 176
Manual reset .................................222
Manual selection (AF) ...................105
Manual white balance ...................142
Maximum burst .........................95, 96
Medium (image-recording quality) ..24
Memory cards 9 Cards
Menu .............................................. 46
My Menu .................................. 305
Setting procedure....................... 47
Settings .................................... 324
3 icon......................................... 8
Metering mode ............................. 121
Metering timer ...................... 163, 209
MF (manual focusing)........... 107, 176
Microphone................................... 182
Miniature effect..................... 160, 276
Miniature effect movie .................. 195
Mirror lockup......................... 147, 302
Mode Dial ....................................... 26
Monochrome .................. 82, 102, 139
Movies .......................................... 181
AF method ....................... 192, 207
Attenuator ................................ 210
Autoexposure........................... 182
Editing ...................................... 256
File size.................................... 194
Frame rate ............................... 193
Grid .......................................... 209
Information display................... 187
Manual exposure ..................... 185
Manual focus............................ 182
Metering timer .......................... 209
Miniature effect movie.............. 195
Movie Servo AF ....................... 207
Movie recording size ................ 193
Playback .................................. 254
Quick Control ........................... 192
Recording time......................... 194
Sound recording....................... 210
Still photo shooting................... 190
Video snapshot album ............. 197
Video snapshots....................... 197
Viewing on a TV set ......... 252, 262
Wind filter ................................. 210
Multi Shot Noise Reduction .......... 131
My Menu....................................... 305
385
Index
N
Neutral ..........................................102
Night Portrait...................................76
Night scenes .............................76, 77
Noise reduction
High ISO speed ........................131
Long exposures........................132
Nomenclature .................................22
Non-Canon flash units ..................312
Normal (image-recording quality) ...24
NTSC ....................................193, 327
O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF)...........103
P
P (Program AE) ..............................92
PAL .......................................193, 327
Paper settings (printing)................284
Partial metering.............................121
Peripheral illumination
correction ......................................134
Personal white balance.................143
Photobook set-up..........................295
PictBridge .....................................281
Picture Style..................101, 137, 140
Pixels ..............................................94
Playback .................................89, 241
Portrait ....................................68, 101
Possible shots...................36, 94, 151
Power
Auto power off ..........................217
Battery check..............................36
Household power .....................308
Possible shots ..............36, 94, 151
Recharging .................................30
Predictive (AI Servo).....................104
Pressing completely........................43
Pressing halfway.............................43
386
Printing ......................................... 281
Cropping .................................. 289
Page layout.............................. 285
Paper settings.......................... 284
Photobook set-up..................... 295
Print order (DPOF)................... 291
Printing effects ......................... 286
Tilt correction ........................... 289
Program AE.................................... 92
Program shift .................................. 93
Protecting images ........................ 266
Q
Q (Quick
Control) ............ 44, 80, 155, 192, 250
Quick mode .................................. 172
R
Rating mark.................................. 248
RAW ................................... 24, 95, 97
RAW+JPEG ....................... 24, 95, 97
Recharging..................................... 30
Red-eye reduction........................ 112
Release shutter without card........ 216
Remote control shooting .............. 309
Remote switch.............................. 310
Resizing ....................................... 277
Revert to default settings ............. 227
Rotation (image)........... 225, 247, 289
S
Safety precautions ....................... 353
Saturation..................................... 138
Scene icons.......................... 153, 184
SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards
Second-curtain synchronization ... 234
Self-timer...................................... 110
Sensor cleaning ................... 236, 239
Sepia (monochrome).............. 82, 139
Sharpness .................................... 138
Index
Shooting information display.........270
Shooting mode................................26
Av (Aperture-priority AE) ..........116
M (Manual exposure)................119
P (Program AE) ..........................92
Tv (Shutter-priority AE).............114
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) .......58
7 (Flash Off).............................63
C (Creative Auto) .....................64
2 (Portrait) ................................68
3 (Landscape) .........................69
4 (Close-up)..............................70
5 (Sports).................................71
SCN (Special scene) ..................72
C(Kids) ...................................73
P (Food)..................................74
x (Candlelight) .......................75
6 (Night Portrait) ....................76
F (Handheld Night Scene) .....77
G (HDR Backlight Control).....78
Shooting settings ......................24, 50
Shutter button .................................43
Shutter synchronization ................234
Shutter-priority AE.........................114
Silent shooting
Continuous shooting.................108
Single shooting .........................108
Single
shooting ..........67, 108, 317, 319, 321
Single-image display.......................89
Single-point AF .............................105
Slide show.....................................258
Small
(image-recording quality) ........24, 278
Soft focus ..............................159, 275
Software........................................365
Speaker.........................................254
Special scene mode........................72
Sports..............................................71
Spot metering................................121
sRGB............................................ 146
Strap ............................................... 29
System map ................................. 322
T
Tap.................................................. 53
Temperature warning............ 178, 212
Time zone....................................... 37
Tone priority.................................. 301
Toning effect (monochrome)......... 139
Touch beeping ................................ 54
Touch screen ............ 23, 53, 245, 255
Touch Shutter ............................... 174
Toy camera effect ................. 160, 276
Tripod socket .................................. 23
Tv (Shutter-priority AE)................. 114
U
USB (digital) terminal ........... 282, 363
V
Video snapshot album .................. 197
Video snapshots ........................... 197
Video system................ 193, 265, 327
Viewfinder....................................... 25
Dioptric adjustment .................... 42
Viewing on a TV set ............. 252, 262
Volume (movie playback) ............. 255
W
Water painting effect............. 159, 276
WB (white balance) ...................... 142
White balance............................... 142
Bracketing ................................ 145
Correction ................................ 144
Custom..................................... 142
Personal................................... 143
Wind filter ..................................... 210
387
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Europe, Africa & Middle East
CANON EUROPA N.V.
PO Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands
For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support
The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of October 2014.
For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon website.
CEL-SU3UA211
© CANON INC. 2014
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement